M2
Owner's Manual for the vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW M2.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new
BMW M2. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehi‐
cle. It contains important information on vehicle operation that
will help you make full use of the technical features available in
your BMW M2. The manual also contains information designed
to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contrib‐
ute to maintaining the value of your BMW M2.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
You can find supplementary information in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.
Additional information on the Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
© 2017 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID5 VI/17, 07 17 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 236.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can be called up via the fol‐
lowing Owner's Manuals: Integrated Owner's
Manual on the Control Display in the vehicle,
Online Owner's Manual, BMW Driver’s Guide
App.
6 Information
At a glance
16 Cockpit
20 iDrive
29 Voice activation system
32 General settings
45 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Controls
50 Opening and closing
67 Settings
79 Transporting children safely
84 Driving
99 Displays
112 Lights
117 Safety
135 Driving stability control systems
140 Driving comfort
148 Climate control
157 Interior equipment
165 Storage compartments
Driving tips
172 BMW M2 Technology
173 Things to remember when driving
177 Loading
180 Saving fuel
Mobility
184 Refueling
186 Fuel
188 Wheels and tires
202 Engine compartment
204 Engine oil
208 Coolant
210 Maintenance
212 Replacing components
218 Breakdown assistance
225 Care
Reference
232 Technical data
234 Appendix
236 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Information
Using this Owner's Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
cle.
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as
printed book from the service center.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can be called up via the fol‐
lowing Owner's Manuals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual on the Control
Display in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Additional sources of
information
Dealer’s service center
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
questions at any time.
Internet
The Owner's Manual and general information
on BMW, for example on technology, are avail‐
able on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
BMW Driver’s Guide App
The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
tries as an app. Additional information on the
Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the
vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
information.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
"..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to
select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
Seite 6
Information
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
numbered list. The steps must be carried out
in the defined order.
1. First action step.
2. Second action step.
Enumerations
Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐
ternative possibilities are presented as list with
bullet points.
▷ First possibility.
▷ Second possibility.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the
relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Vehicle features and options
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes
and illustrates features and functions that are
not available in your vehicle, for example be‐
cause of the selected optional features or the
country-specific version.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
For any options and equipment not described
in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Manuals.
Your dealer’s service center is happy to answer
any questions that you may have about the
features and options applicable to your vehicle.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
cle.
For Your Own Safety
Intended use
Observe the following when using the vehicle:
▷ Owner's Manual.
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove
stickers.
▷ Technical vehicle data.
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where
the vehicle is driven.
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory docu‐
ments.
Seite 7
Information
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments applying in the country of first delivery,
also known as homologation. If your vehicle is
to be operated in a different country it might be
necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially
differing operating conditions and permit re‐
quirements. If your vehicle does not comply
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐
tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐
formation on warranty is available from a
dealer’s service center.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e. g. the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
a BMW dealer’s service center. If you choose
to use another service facility, BMW recom‐
mends use of a facility that performs work, for
instance maintenance and repair, according to
BMW specifications with properly trained per‐
sonnel, referred to in this Owner's Manual as
"another qualified service center or repair
shop".
If work is performed improperly, for instance
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of sub‐
sequent damage and related safety risks.
Parts and accessories
BMW recommends the use of parts and ac‐
cessory products approved by BMW.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice
on their use and installation are available from
a BMW dealer's service center.
BMW parts and accessories have been tested
by BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW
vehicles.
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
sories.
BMW does not evaluate whether each individ‐
ual product from another manufacturer can be
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
safety hazard, even if a country-specific official
approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate
whether these products are suitable for BMW
vehicles under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐
ranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐
ited Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Seite 8
Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating
conditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
country or region. In such case, please contact
Customer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Data memory
General information
Electronic control devices are installed in the
vehicle. Some of these are necessary for the
vehicle to function safely or provide assistance
during driving, for instance driver assistance
systems. Furthermore, control devices facili‐
tate comfort or infotainment functions.
Electronic control devices contain data memo‐
ries, which are able to temporarily or perma‐
nently store information about the condition of
the vehicle, component load, maintenance re‐
quirements, technical events or faults.
This information generally records the state of
a component, a module, a system or the envi‐
ronment, for instance:
▷ Operating states of system components,
e.g., fill levels, tire pressure, battery status.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its in‐
dividual components, e.g., wheel rotational
speed, wheel speed, deceleration, trans‐
verse acceleration, engaged safety belt in‐
dicator.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
tem components, for instance lights and
brakes.
▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or en‐
gagement of the stability control systems.
▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain
sensor signals.
The data is required to perform the control de‐
vice functions. Furthermore, it also serves to
recognize and correct malfunctions, and helps
the vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle
functions. The majority of this data is transient
and is only processed within the vehicle itself.
Only a small proportion of the data is stored in
event or fault memories and, if needed, in the
vehicle key.
Reading out data
When servicing, for instance during repairs,
service processes, warranty cases, and quality
assurance measures, this technical information
can be read out from the vehicle together with
the vehicle identification number. A dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop can read out the information.
The socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis re‐
quired by law in the vehicle is used to read out
the data. The data is collected, processed, and
used by the relevant organizations in the serv‐
Seite 9
Information
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
ice network. The data documents the technical
conditions of the vehicle, helps in locating
faults and improving quality, and is transferred
to the vehicle manufacturer, if needed.
Furthermore, the manufacturer has product
monitoring duties to meet in line with product
liability law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle
manufacturer needs technical data from the
vehicle. Fault and event memories in the vehi‐
cle can be reset when a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop performs repair or servicing work.
Data on the scope of servicing work performed
and maintenance records are stored in the ve‐
hicle by means of the service history and trans‐
ferred to the vehicle manufacturer. The vehicle
owner can contact a dealer's service center to
object to the data being stored and transferred
to the vehicle manufacturer. This objection ap‐
plies for as long as the vehicle owner remains
the proprietor of the vehicle.
Data entry and data transfer into the
vehicle
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some
data can be transferred into the vehicle when
using comfort and infotainment functions,
for instance:
▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or
photos for playback in an integrated multi‐
media system.
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction
with an integrated hands-free system or an
integrated navigation system.
▷ Entered navigation destinations.
▷ Data on the use of Internet services.
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or
is found on a device that has been connected
to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or
MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle,
it can be deleted at any time. This data is only
transmitted to third parties if expressly desired.
This depends on the personal settings se‐
lected for using online services.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the fol‐
lowing comfort and individual settings can be
stored in the vehicle and modified at any time,
for instance:
▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel
positions.
▷ Suspension and climate control settings.
▷ Individual settings, for instance lighting in
the car's interior.
Control via mobile devices
Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile
devices connected to the vehicle, for instance
smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle
control elements. The sound and picture from
the mobile device can be played back and dis‐
played through the multimedia system. Certain
information is transferred to the mobile device
at the same time. Depending on the type of
connection, this includes, for instance position
data and other general vehicle information.
This optimizes the way in which selected apps,
for instance navigation or music playback,
work.
There is no further interaction between the
mobile device and the vehicle, for instance ac‐
tive access to vehicle data. How the data will
be processed further is determined by the pro‐
vider of the particular app being used. The ex‐
tent of the possible settings depends on the
respective app and the operating system of the
mobile device.
Services
General information
If the vehicle has a wireless network connec‐
tion, this enables data to be exchanged be‐
tween the vehicle and other systems. The
wireless network connection is realized via an
in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via
personal mobile devices brought into the vehi‐
Seite 10
Information
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
cle, for instance smartphones. This wireless
network connection enables 'online functions'
to be used. These include online services and
apps supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or
by other providers.
Services from the vehicle
manufacturer
Where online services from the vehicle manu‐
facturer are concerned, the corresponding
functions are described in the appropriate
place, for instance the Owner's Manual or
manufacturer's website. The relevant legal in‐
formation pertaining to data protection is pro‐
vided there too. Personal data may be used to
perform online services. Data is exchanged
over a secure connection, for instance with the
IT systems of the vehicle manufacturer in‐
tended for this purpose. Any collection, proc‐
essing, and use of personal data above and be‐
yond that needed to provide the services must
always be based on a legal permission, con‐
tractual arrangement or consent.
In addition, the vehicle manufacturer evaluates
anonymized information on transport infra‐
structure and how the infotainment system is
used. This information cannot be traced back
to individual vehicles or people. Evaluating the
data enables the manufacturer to further im‐
prove its products or services, for instance by
incorporating the most up-to-date traffic bulle‐
tins. The data transfer feature can be deacti‐
vated in the vehicle. Certain services and func‐
tions, some of which are subject to a charge,
can be deactivated by the driver. It is also pos‐
sible to activate or deactivate the data connec‐
tion as a whole. That is, with the exception of
functions and services required by law such as
Assist systems.
Services from other providers
When using online services from other provid‐
ers, these services are the responsibility of the
relevant provider and subject to their data pri‐
vacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle
manufacturer has no influence on the content
exchanged during this process. Information on
the way in which personal data is collected and
used in relation to services from third parties,
the scope of such data, and its purpose, can be
obtained from the relevant service provider.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
tions and no personal data, for instance name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
Seite 11
Information
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Vehicle identification
number
The vehicle identification number can be found
in the engine compartment, on the right-hand
side of the vehicle.
The vehicle identification number can also be
found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
formation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 12
Information
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Seite 13
Information
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
At a glance
This chapter shows the arrangement of the
buttons, switches and displays. Moreover, you
will become familiar with the available control
concepts and options quickly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Power windows 63
2 Exterior mirror operation 75
3 Glove compartment on the driver's
side 166
Driver assistance systems
Intelligent Safety 125
Lane departure warning 132
4 Lights
Light switch 112
Lights off
Daytime running lights 114
Parking lights 112
Low beams 112
Seite 16
At a glance Cockpit
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 113
Adaptive light functions 114
High-beam Assistant 114
Instrument lighting 115
5 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 89
High beams, head‐
light flasher 89
High-beam Assistant 114
Roadside parking lights 112
Onboard Computer 108
6 M double-clutch transmission: shift pad‐
dles 94
7 Steering wheel buttons, left
Cruise control on/off, inter‐
rupt 140
Cruise control: store speed
Cruise control: resume speed
Cruise control rocker switch
8 Instrument cluster 99
9 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source, see Own‐
er's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment and Communication 6
Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Voice activation 29
Telephone, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Thumbwheel for selection lists 108
10 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 85
Auto Start/Stop function 86
11 Steering column stalk, right
Wipers 90
Rain sensor 91
Clean the windshield and head‐
lights 91
12 Horn, entire surface
13 Heated steering wheel 78
14 Adjust the steering wheel 77
15 Unlock hood 202
Seite 17
Cockpit At a glance
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 20
2 Glove compartment 165
3 Ventilation 154
4 Hazard warning system 218
Central locking system 54
5 Radio/CD/multimedia, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐
nication 6
6 Climate control 148
7 Controller with buttons 20
8 Parking brake 89
9 Driving Dynamics Control 137
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 135
10 M double-clutch transmission, selector
lever 94
Manual transmission, selector lever 94
Seite 18
At a glance Cockpit
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
iDrive
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
The concept
The iDrive combines the functions of many
switches. These functions can be operated via
the Controller.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information
systems and communication devices while
driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident. Only use the systems or devices
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary,
stop and use the systems and devices while
the vehicle is stationary.◀
Operation
Overview
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
the equipment version, with touchpad
Control Display
General information
To clean the Control Display, follow the care
instructions, refer to page 228.
Do not place objects close to the Control Dis‐
play; otherwise, the Control Display can be
damaged.
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Control Display, for instance due to intense so‐
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced
down to complete deactivation. Once the tem‐
perature is reduced, for instance through
shade or air conditioning, the normal functions
are restored.
Switching on
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the Controller.
Switching off
1. Press button.
Seite 20
At a glance iDrive
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
2. "Turn off control display"
Controller with navigation system
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the Controller, refer to
page 26.
Operation
▷ Turn.
▷ Press.
▷ Move in four directions.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: call up main menu.
Press twice: display all menu items
of the main menu.
Open the Communication menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
Open destination input menu for
navigation.
Open navigation map.
Press once: open the previous dis‐
play.
Press and hold: open the menus
used last.
Open the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Operation
▷ Turn.
Seite 21
iDrive At a glance
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ Press.
▷ Move in two directions.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: call up main menu.
Press twice: display all menu items
of the main menu.
Open the Communication menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
Button Function
Press once: open the previous dis‐
play.
Press and hold: open the menus
used last.
Open the Options menu.
Operating with the Controller
Opening the main menu
Press button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Adapting the main menu
1. Press the button twice.
All menu items of the main menu are dis‐
played.
2. Select a menu item.
3. To move the menu item to the desired po‐
sition, tilt the Controller to the right or left.
Seite 22
At a glance iDrive
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, for exam‐
ple "iDrive settings".
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, for instance
"iDrive settings", a new display appears.
▷ Move the Controller to the left.
Closes the current display and shows the
previous display.
▷
Press button.
The previous display opens.
▷ Move the Controller to the right.
New display is opened.
The arrow indicates that additional displays
can be opened.
Opening recently used menus
The recently used menus can be displayed.
Press and hold this button.
Opening the Options menu
Press button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
The Options menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, for instance "Split
screen".
▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, for instance for "Media/Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, for instance "Save
station".
Changing settings
1.
Select a field.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is displayed.
3. Press the Controller.
Seite 23
iDrive At a glance
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the func‐
tion.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Entering letters and numbers
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered via the
controller.
The keyboard's display changes automatically.
Entering
1.
Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. : confirm entry.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the let‐
ters or number.
Hold the controller down: delete all
letters or numbers.
Switching between upper/lower case,
numbers and characters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers.
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the
choice is narrowed down with every letter en‐
tered and letters may be added automatically.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during entry
for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: place names can be
entered in all languages that are available
in iDrive.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en‐
tries, the letters for which there is an entry are
displayed at the left edge.
1.
Turn the Controller to the left or right
quickly.
All letters for which there are entries are
displayed on the left side.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐
played.
Operating via touchscreen
General information
The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐
screen.
Touch screen with your fingers. Do not use
any objects.
Opening the main menu
Tap on symbol.
Seite 24
At a glance iDrive
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Selecting menu items
Tap desired menu item.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, for exam‐
ple "iDrive settings".
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, a new display
opens.
The white arrow indicates that additional dis‐
plays can be called up.
▷ Swipe to the left.
▷ Tap on symbol.
New display is opened.
Opening recently used menus
1. Tap on symbol.
2. Tap on symbol.
Changing settings
Settings such as volumes can be changed via
the touchscreen.
▷ Slide in the selected field to the right or
left, until the desired setting is displayed.
▷ , Tap on symbol.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the func‐
tion.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Entering letters and numbers
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
Controller or the touchscreen.
The keyboard's display changes automatically.
Seite 25
iDrive At a glance
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Symbol Function
Tapping the symbol: delete the let‐
ter or number.
Tapping and holding the symbol for
an extended period: delete all letters
or numbers.
Switching between upper/lower case,
numbers and characters
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Operating navigation map
The navigation map can be moved with the
touchscreen.
Function Operation
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out with the fin‐
gers.
Touchpad
General information
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the Controller.
Selecting functions
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Touchpad"
4. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
▷ "Map": using the map.
▷ "Search fields": write letters without
selecting the list field.
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
letters and numbers.
Entering letters and numbers
Entering letters requires some practice at the
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
following:
▷ The system distinguishes between upper
and lower-case letters and numbers. To
make entries, it may be necessary to
change between upper and lower-case let‐
ters, numbers and characters, refer to
page 24.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
the Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such
as accents or periods so that the letter can
be clearly recognized. The set language
determines what input is possible. Where
necessary, enter special characters via the
Controller.
▷ To delete a character, swipe to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, swipe to the right
in the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, swipe to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad.
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right
in the lower area of the touchpad.
Using the map
The map in the navigation system can be
moved via the touchpad.
Function Operation
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐
rection.
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out on the touch‐
pad with fingers.
Display menu. Tap once.
Seite 26
At a glance iDrive
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed in sev‐
eral menus on the right side of the split screen,
for example information from the onboard
computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on/off
1. Press button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
The display can be selected in menus, where
the split screen is supported.
1.
Move the Controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. Select the desired setting.
Specifying the number of displays
It is possible to specify the number of displays.
1.
Move the Controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. "Personalize menu"
4. Select desired setting.
5. Move the Controller to the left.
Status information
General information
The status field can be found in the upper area
of the Control Display. Status information is
displayed in the form of symbols.
Status field symbols
Radio
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Signal strength of cellular network.
Network search.
Cellular network is not available.
The critical charge state of the mo‐
bile phone has been reached.
Roaming is active.
SMS text message received.
Message received.
Reminder.
Sending not possible.
Contacts are loaded.
Seite 27
iDrive At a glance
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Entertainment
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
Bluetooth audio.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
WiFi.
iPod.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Check Control message.
The sound output has been
switched off.
Encrypted connection not active.
Request for the current vehicle po‐
sition.
Checking the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation
destinations, phone numbers and menu en‐
tries.
Settings are stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Saving a function
1. Select function via iDrive.
2.
Press and hold the desired button
until a signal sounds.
Running a function
Press button.
The function will work immediately. This
means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves
or use objects.
The button assignment is displayed at the top
edge of screen.
Deleting the button assignments
1.
Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
Seite 28
At a glance iDrive
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Concept
Most functions displayed on the Control Dis‐
play can be operated by voice commands via
the voice activation system. The system sup‐
ports you with announcements during input.
General information
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary can only be operated
via the voice activation system to a limited
extent.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal
instructions to use with the voice activation
system.
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
To set the language, refer to page 32.
Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are possible, operate
the function via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Briefly press the button on the steer‐
ing wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
General information
Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
Commands from other menus can also be spo‐
ken.
You may select list entries such as phone list
entries via voice activation. Read these list en‐
tries out loud exactly as they are shown in the
respective list.
Displaying possible commands
The following is displayed in the top area of the
Control Display:
Seite 29
Voice activation system At a glance
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ Some possible commands for the current
menu.
▷ Some possible commands from other me‐
nus.
▷ Status of the voice recognition.
▷ Encrypted connection is not available.
Help on the voice activation system
▷ To have information on the operating prin‐
ciple of the voice activation system read
out loud: ›General information on voice
control‹.
▷ To have help for the current menu read out
loud: ›Help‹.
One example: opening the
tone settings
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the Controller.
1.
Turn on the Entertainment sound output if
needed.
2.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Media and radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
Adjusting
Setting the voice dialog
Set system to standard dialog or use a short
version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays
back short messages in abbreviated form.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speech mode:"
5. Select desired setting.
Selecting the input language
For some languages, the input language can
be selected.
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Voice control:"
5. Select desired setting.
Activating voice recognition via the
server
The voice recognition feature via the server
provides a dictation function and a natural
method of entering destinations while improv‐
ing the quality of voice recognition. To use the
functions, data is transmitted to a service pro‐
vider and locally stored there.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Server speech recognition"
Speaking during voice output
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
voice activation system. The function can be
deactivated if inquiries are often undesirably
interrupted, for instance due to background
noise or talking.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speaking during voice output"
Seite 30
At a glance Voice activation system
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the drive profile
currently used.
Information on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 218, close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 31
Voice activation system At a glance
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
General settings
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Language
Setting the language
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 30.
Time
Setting the time zone
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time zone:"
5. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the time
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed.
8. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the time format
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time format:"
5. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Automatic time setting
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
Seite 32
At a glance General settings
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
3. "Date and time"
4. "Automatic time setting"
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Date
Setting the date
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Make the settings for the month and year.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the date format
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date format:"
5. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the units of
measurement
You can set the units of measurement for
some values, for example, fuel consumption,
distances and temperature.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Units"
4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Activating/deactivating the
display of the current vehicle
position
Concept
If vehicle location has been activated, the cur‐
rent vehicle position can be displayed in the
BMW Connected app or in the Connected‐
Drive customer portal.
Activating/deactivating
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Vehicle tracking"
4. "Vehicle tracking"
Activating/deactivating
popup windows
For some functions, popup windows are dis‐
played automatically on the Control Display.
Some of these popup windows can be acti‐
vated or deactivated.
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Pop-ups"
4. Select the desired setting.
Seite 33
General settings At a glance
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Control Display
Brightness
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Screen saver
If no settings are made via iDriver, after a time
that can be set, a screen saver is displayed.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Screensaver"
6. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Selecting the contents of the main
menu
For some menu items of the main menu, the
displayed contents can be selected.
1. Press button.
2. "Contents of main menu"
3. Select the desired menu and the desired
content.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Messages
Concept
The menu centrally displays all messages ar‐
riving in the vehicle in list form.
General information
The following messages can be displayed:
▷ Traffic messages.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Communication messages, for example e-
mails, SMS text messages or reminders.
▷ Service requirements messages.
Messages are additionally displayed in the sta‐
tus field.
Retrieving messages
Using iDrive:
1.
"Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
The respective menu is opened, where the
message is displayed.
Deleting messages
All messages, except Check Control mes‐
sages, can be deleted from the list. Check
Control messages are displayed as long as
they are relevant.
About iDrive:
1.
"Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
Seite 34
At a glance General settings
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
3.
Press button.
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all
notifications"
Settings
The following settings can be adjusted:
▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐
sages will be permitted.
▷ Sort the messages according to date or
priority.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Notifications"
4. Select the desired setting.
Data protection
Data transfer
Concept
The vehicle offers different functions, whose
use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv‐
ice provider. The data transfer can be deacti‐
vated for some functions.
General information
With data transfer deactivated, the respective
function cannot be used.
Only make these settings while stationary.
Activating/deactivating the data
transfer
Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
Using iDrive:
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "iDrive settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. Select the desired setting.
Deleting personal in the vehicle
The concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves
personal data, such as stored radio stations.
These personal data can be permanently de‐
leted through iDrive.
General information
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:
▷ Driver profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.
▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destina‐
tions.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cook‐
ies.
▷ Office data, for instance voice notes.
▷ Login accounts.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 15 minutes.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data
Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐
trol Display.
Using iDrive:
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "iDrive settings"
4. "Data privacy"
Seite 35
General settings At a glance
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
5. "Delete personal data"
6. "Delete personal data"
7. "OK"
8. Exit and lock the vehicle.
After 15 minutes, the deletion process is com‐
pleted.
If not all of the data was deleted, repeat the de‐
letion.
Canceling deletion
Start the engine to cancel deletion of the data.
Connections
Concept
Various connection types are available for us‐
ing mobile devices in the vehicle. The connec‐
tion type to select depends on the mobile de‐
vice and the desired function.
General information
The following overview shows possible func‐
tions and the suitable connection types for
them. The scope of functions depends on the
mobile device.
Function Connec‐
tion type
Making calls via the hands-free
system.
Using phone functions via iDrive.
Using the smartphone Office
functions.
Bluetooth.
Playing music from the smart‐
phone or the audio player.
Bluetooth
or USB.
Using compatible apps via iDrive. Bluetooth
or USB.
Function Connec‐
tion type
USB storage device:
Exporting and importing driver
profiles.
Performing software updates.
Exporting and importing stored
trips.
Playing music.
USB.
Playing videos from the smart‐
phone or the USB storage de‐
vice.
USB.
Using the vehicle Internet ac‐
cess.
Internet
hotspot.
Use Apple Carplay apps via
iDrive and voice operation.
Bluetooth
and WiFi.
Screen Mirroring:
Showing the smartphone display
on the Control Display.
WiFi.
The following connection types require one-
time pairing with the vehicle:
▷ Bluetooth.
▷ Internet hotspot.
▷ Apple CarPlay.
▷ Screen Mirroring.
Paired devices are automatically recognized
later on and connected to the vehicle.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information
systems and communication devices while
driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident. Only use the systems or devices
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary,
stop and use the systems and devices while
the vehicle is stationary.◀
Seite 36
At a glance General settings
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Compatible devices
General information
Information on mobile devices compatible with
the vehicle can be found at www.bmwusa.com/
bluetooth.
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed
or deviating software versions.
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
When looking for compatible devices, you may
have to state the vehicle identification number
and the software part number. These numbers
can be displayed in the vehicle.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info"
6. "System information"
A software update, refer to page 43, can be
performed, if needed.
Bluetooth connection
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 37, with
Bluetooth interface.
▷ The remote control is in the vehicle.
▷ The device is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the device and in
the vehicle, refer to page 37.
▷ Bluetooth pre-settings may be required on
the device, for instance visibility, refer to
the owner's manual of the device.
Switching on Bluetooth
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth®"
Activating/deactivating telephone
functions
To use all supported functions of a mobile
phone, the following functions must be acti‐
vated prior to pairing.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Office"
Activate function to transmit short
messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks,
notes, and reminders to the vehicle.
Costs can be incurred by transmitting
all data to the vehicle.
▷ "Contact images"
Activate function to show the contact
pictures.
6. Move the Controller to the left.
Pairing the mobile device with the
vehicle
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. Select the functions for which the device
will be used:
Seite 37
General settings At a glance
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ "Telephone"
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
▷ "Apps"
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played on the Control Display.
6. Search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity
of the mobile device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile device display.
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.
7. Depending on the mobile device, a control
number is displayed or the control number
must be entered.
▷ Compare the control number displayed
on the Control Display with the control
number on the display of the device.
Confirm the control number on the de‐
vice and on the Control Display.
▷ Enter and confirm the same control
number on the device and via iDrive.
The device is connected and displayed in
the device list, refer to page 41.
If connection was not successful: Frequently
Asked Questions, refer to page 38.
Frequently asked questions
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as
expected.
In this case, the following explanations can
help:
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or
connected?
▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices
connected to the mobile phone or vehicle.
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connec‐
tions with other devices.
Delete all known Bluetooth connections
from the device list on the mobile phone
and start a new device search.
▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode
or has only a limited remaining battery life.
Charge mobile phone.
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is pos‐
sible that only one mobile phone can be
connected to the vehicle.
Unpair the connected mobile phone from
the vehicle and pair and connect only one
mobile phone.
Why does the mobile phone no longer react?
▷ The applications on the mobile phone do
not function anymore.
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
▷ Too high or too low ambient temperatures
for mobile phone operation.
Do not subject the mobile phone to ex‐
treme ambient temperatures.
Why can phone functions not be used via
iDrive?
▷ The mobile phone may not be properly
configured, for instance as Bluetooth audio
device.
Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐
phone or additional phone function.
Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐
played or why are they incomplete?
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
are transmitted.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts
from social networks.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
Seite 38
At a glance General settings
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for
instance due to stored information such as
notes.
Reduce the data volume of the contact.
▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as
audio source or as telephone.
Configure the mobile phone and connect it
with the telephone or additional phone
function.
How can the phone connection quality be im‐
proved?
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending
on the mobile phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter or place it in the area of the center
console.
▷ Insert mobile phone into the wireless
charging tray.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and
loudspeakers separately.
If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available, con‐
tact the hotline, a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
USB connection
General information
Mobile devices with a USB port are connected
to the USB interface.
▷ Mobile phones.
The snap-in adapter features a separate
USB port that is automatically connected
when a compatible mobile phone is in‐
serted.
▷ Audio devices with USB port, for instance
MP3 player.
▷ USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported.
FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended
formats.
The following applications are possible:
▷ Exporting and importing driver profiles, re‐
fer to page 58.
▷ Playing music files via USB audio.
▷ Playing videos via USB video.
▷ Loading of software updates, refer to
page 43.
Follow the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB storage device against
mechanical damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB media
available on the market, it cannot be guar‐
anteed that every device is operable on the
vehicle.
▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐
ronmental conditions, such as very high
temperatures; refer to the owner's manual
of the device.
▷ Due to the many different compression
techniques, proper playback of the media
stored on the USB storage device cannot
be guaranteed in all cases.
▷ A connected USB storage device will be
supplied with charging current via the USB
interface if the device supports this.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the
stored data, do not charge a USB storage
device via the onboard socket, when it is
connected to the USB interface.
▷ Depending on how the USB storage device
is being used, settings may be required on
the USB storage device, refer to the own‐
er's manual of the device.
Not compatible USB media:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
serts.
Seite 39
General settings At a glance
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ HFS-formatted USB media.
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
Functional requirement
Compatible device, refer to page 37, with USB
interface.
Connecting the device
Connect the USB storage device using a suita‐
ble adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to
page 163.
The USB storage device is displayed in the de‐
vice list, refer to page 41.
Internet connection
General information
Up to 8 devices can be connected with the In‐
ternet hotspot.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 37, with
WiFi interface.
▷ ConnectedDrive contract.
▷ Data contract with a service provider.
▷ WiFi activated on the device.
▷ Internet hotspot activated in the vehicle.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
Activating the Internet hotspot
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Internet hotspot"
Connecting device with Internet
hotspot
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. "Internet hotspot"
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐
played on the Control Display.
6. Search for WiFi networks on the device.
Select network name on the device.
7. Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐
nect.
With the first Internet usage via the Internet
hotspot, data volume must be purchased from
a service provider.
All devices connected via the Internet hotspot
use this data volume.
If necessary, data volume can be purchased
from the ConnectedDrive Store.
Settings
The network name and hotspot code can be
changed. In addition, the network name can be
hidden so that it cannot be found by other de‐
vices.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4.
Press button.
5.
▷ "Change hotspot key"
Enter the desired hotspot code.
▷ "Change hotspot name"
Enter the desired network name.
▷ "Hide hotspot"
Seite 40
At a glance General settings
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Activate or deactivate the function.
6. To confirm entry of the hotspot code or the
name of the network:
Select the symbol.
Apple CarPlay
Concept
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compati‐
ble Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice op‐
eration and iDrive.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible iPhone, refer to page 37.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation
are switched on on the iPhone.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following settings:
▷ "Bluetooth®"
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
Pairing iPhone with CarPlay
Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle, refer
to page 37.
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and
displayed in the device list, refer to page 41.
Operation
For more information, see the Integrated Own‐
er's Manual, Online Owner's Manual, BMW
Driver’s Guide app or, if necessary, the Own‐
er's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication.
Frequently asked questions
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as
expected.
In this case, the following explanations can
help:
The iPhone has already been paired with Apple
CarPlay. When a new connection is estab‐
lished, CarPlay can no longer be selected.
▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the de‐
vice list.
▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con‐
cerned from the list of stored vehicles un‐
der Bluetooth and under WiFi.
▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.
If the steps listed have been carried out and
the required function is still not available: con‐
tact the hotline, a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Managing mobile devices
General information
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are au‐
tomatically recognized and reconnected
when the ignition is switched on.
▷ The data stored on the SIM card or in the
mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle
after recognition.
▷ For some devices, certain settings may be
necessary, for instance authorization, see
owner's manual of the device.
Displaying the device list
All devices paired and/or connected with the
vehicle are displayed in the device list.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
Seite 41
General settings At a glance
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
A symbol indicates, for which function a device
is used.
Symbol Function
"Telephone"
"Additional telephone"
"Bluetooth® audio"
"Apps"
"Internet hotspot"
"Apple CarPlay"
Configuring the device
Functions can be activated or deactivated for
paired and connected devices.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select the desired device.
5. Select the desired setting.
If a function is assigned to a device, the func‐
tion will be deactivated where appropriate for a
device that is already connected and the de‐
vice will be disconnected.
Disconnecting the device
The connection of the device to the vehicle is
disconnected.
The device remains paired and can be con‐
nected again, refer to page 42.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Disconnect device"
Connecting the device
A disconnected device can be reconnected.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Connect device"
The functions that were assigned to the device
before disconnecting are assigned to the de‐
vice when it is reconnected. If the device is al‐
ready connected, these functions are deacti‐
vated.
Deleting the device
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Delete device"
The device is disconnected and removed from
the device list.
Swapping the telephone and
additional phone
If two mobile phones are connected to the ve‐
hicle, the functions of the phone and additional
phone can be switched.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."
Seite 42
At a glance General settings
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Software update
General information
The vehicle supports a large number of mobile
devices, e.g., mobile phones and MP3 players.
Software updates are available for many of the
supported devices. The vehicle is maintained
up-to-date via regular vehicle software up‐
dates.
Updates and related current information is
available at www.bmw.com/update.
Displaying the installed software
version
The software version installed in the vehicle is
displayed.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Show current version"
If an update has been carried out before, select
the desired version to display additional infor‐
mation.
Updating software via USB
The software may only be updated when the
vehicle is stationary.
About iDrive:
1.
Store the file for the software update in the
main directory of a USB flash drive.
2. Connect the USB data storage to an USB
interface.
3. "My Vehicle"
4. "iDrive settings"
5. "Software update"
6. "Update software"
7. "USB"
8. "Install software"
9. "OK"
10. Await the updating.
11. Confirm system restart.
Updating software via BMW
Teleservices
Updating software via BMW Teleservices is
country-specific and may not be available.
The software is first transferred into the vehicle
and can then be installed. The software can be
installed at a time different from the time of
transfer.
The software can be transferred while driving,
and if the trip is interrupted it will resume auto‐
matically the next time the vehicle is driven. All
other functions remain available during the
transfer. Cellular network reception must be
available for the transfer to take place.
The software may only be updated when the
vehicle is stationary.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Update software"
5. "Teleservices"
6. "Load update"
The update is loaded but not installed.
7. Install or delete the update.
▷ "Install software"
The loaded update is installed.
This step can be carried out at a later
point in time.
▷ "Remove update"
The loaded update is removed.
The following steps are omitted.
8. "OK"
9. Wait for the update to complete.
10. Confirm system restart.
Seite 43
General settings At a glance
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Restoring the software version
The software version before the last software
update and the version before the first soft‐
ware update can be restored.
The software may only be restored when the
vehicle is stationary.
About iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Restore software"
5.
▷ "Previous version"
The previous software version is re‐
stored.
▷ "Default software settings"
The first software version is restored.
6. "Remove software"
7. "OK"
8. Wait for restore.
9. Confirm system restart.
Seite 44
At a glance General settings
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Integrated Owner's Manual
in the vehicle
Concept
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
describes features and functions found in the
vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be
displayed on the Control Display.
Components of the Integrated
Owner's Manual
The Integrated owner's manual consists of
four parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or possible access.
Quick Reference Guide
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
tion how to operate the car, how to use basic
vehicle functions and what to do in case of a
breakdown. This information can also be dis‐
played while driving.
Search by images
Image search provides information and de‐
scriptions. This is helpful when the terminol‐
ogy for a feature is not at hand.
Keyword search
Search for information and descriptions by en‐
tering terms selected from the index.
Videos
The basic functions of selected systems are
explained in the videos.
Select components
1.
Press button.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "Owner's Manual"
4. Select desired setting.
Scrolling through the owner's manual
Turn Controller, until the next or previous con‐
tents are displayed.
Context help - Owner's Manual to the
temporarily selected function
You may open the relevant information di‐
rectly.
Opening via iDrive
Change directly to the Options menu from the
function on the Control Display:
1. Press button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
Seite 45
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Changing between a function and the
operating instructions
To switch from a function, for instance radio, to
the Owner's Manual on the Control Display
and to alternate between the two displays:
1.
Press button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press button again to return to last
displayed function.
5.
Press button to return to the page of
the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate continuously between the last dis‐
played function and the last displayed page of
the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5.
Opens a new display every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The jumps into the Owner's Manual can be
stored on the Programmable memory buttons,
refer to page 28, and called up directly.
Storing
1.
Select the desired entry point via iDrive:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Keyword search"
▷ "Animations"
2.
Press desired button and hold for
more than 2 seconds.
Executing
Press the corresponding button.
The owner's manual is directly dis‐
played via the selected entry point.
Seite 46
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Seite 47
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Controls
The information in this chapter helps you in
confidently operating your vehicle. All features
and accessories that are useful for driving and
your safety, comfort and convenience are
described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Remote control
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key.
Each remote control contains a replaceable
battery. Replace the battery, refer to
page 52.
You may set the key functions depending on
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
sion. Settings, refer to page 60.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every
remote control. Driver profile, refer to
page 58.
The remote controls hold information about re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐
mote control, refer to page 210.
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take
the remote control with you so that the vehicle
can be opened from the outside.◀
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐
ble with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the tailgate
4 Panic mode
Seite 50
Controls Opening and closing
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Unlocking
Press button on the remote control.
Depending on the settings, refer to page 60,
the following access points are unlocked.
▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap.
Press the button of the remote control
again to unlock the other vehicle access
points.
▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap.
In addition, the following functions are exe‐
cuted:
▷ The settings stored in the driver profile, re‐
fer to page 58, are applied.
▷ The driver's seat is set to the last position
saved in the driver's profile. This function
must be activated in the settings, refer to
page 60.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off. Switch
the interior lights on/off manually, refer to
page 116.
▷ The exterior lighting activated in the set‐
tings, refer to page 60, is switched on.
▷ Automatically folded in exterior mirrors are
folded open. This function must be acti‐
vated in the settings.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 61, is
switched off.
The light functions may depend on the ambi‐
ent brightness.
Convenient opening
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the remote
control is pressed.
Locking
1.
Close the driver's door.
2.
Press button on the remote control.
The following functions are executed:
▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
are being locked.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 61, is
switched on.
If the engine or ignition is still switched on
when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn
honks twice. In this case, the engine or ignition
must be switched off by means of the Start/
Stop button.
Switching on interior lights and
courtesy light
Press button on the remote control with
the vehicle locked.
This function is not available, if the interior
lights were switched off manually.
The light functions may depend on the ambi‐
ent brightness.
After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing
the button again.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, it is possible to specify
whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐
locking with the remote control. Adjusting the
settings, refer to page 60.
The tailgate can only be opened if it is not
locked. Separately lock the tailgate, refer to
page 57.
Seite 51
Opening and closing Controls
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
During opening, the tailgate pivots back
and up. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
Opening
Press button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press button on the remote con‐
trol and hold for at least 3 sec‐
onds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐
trol three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Replacing the battery
1.
Remove the integrated key from the re‐
mote control, refer to page 54.
2. Place the integrated key underneath the
battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and
lift the cover with a lever movement of the
integrated key, arrow 2.
3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow
using a pointed object and lift it out.
4. Insert a type CR 2450 battery with the pos‐
itive side facing up.
5. Press the cover closed.
6. Push the integrated key into the remote
control until it engages.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
Additional remote controls
Additional remote controls are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Loss of the remote controls
A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐
placed by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 52
Controls Opening and closing
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstan‐
ces:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 52.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with electronic devices.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a
charging process of mobile devices, for in‐
stance charging of a mobile phone.
▷ The remote control is in direct proximity of
the wireless charging tray.
Place the remote control down at a differ‐
ent location.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can be
unlocked and locked from the outside with the
integrated key, refer to page 53.
Starting the engine via emergency
detection of the remote control
1. Hold the remote control with its back
against the marked area on the steering
column.
2. Start the engine within 10 seconds.
If the remote control is not detected, slightly
change the position of the remote control and
repeat the procedure.
Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without remote control using the integrated
key.
The integrated key can also be used for the
glove compartment on the front passenger
side.
Safety information
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐
ble with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.◀
Seite 53
Opening and closing Controls
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
NOTE
The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the
integrated key inserted, paint or the integrated
key can be damaged. There is a risk of damage
to property. Remove the integrated key before
pulling the outside door handle.◀
Removing
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
Locking/unlocking via the door lock
Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door
lock using the integrated key.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not switched on if the ve‐
hicle is locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via
the door lock.
In order to stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle
with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
tion, if needed, through emergency detection
of the remote control, refer to page 53.
Button for central locking
system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
Overview
Button for the central locking system.
Unlocking and locking
Press button. For locking, the doors must be
closed.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft
when locking.
Opening
▷
Press button to unlock the doors
together, and then pull the door handle
above the armrest.
Seite 54
Controls Opening and closing
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ On the door to be opened, pull the door
handle twice: the first time unlocks the
door, the second time opens it. The other
doors remain locked.
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
vehicle's interior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Opening tailgate.
Functional requirements
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle near
the doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Unlocking
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front
passenger door completely.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
Locking
Touch the surface on the door handle of the
driver's or front passenger door with your fin‐
ger for approx. 1 second without grasping the
door handle.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
Convenient closing
Safety information
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.◀
Closing
Touch the surface on the door handle of the
driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with
your finger and hold it there without grasping
the door handle.
Seite 55
Opening and closing Controls
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
This corresponds with pressing and holding
the button on the remote control.
In addition to locking, the windows and the
glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors
fold in.
Open tailgate
General information
If you open the tailgate via Comfort Access,
locked doors will not be unlocked.
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
During opening, the tailgate pivots back
and up. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
Opening
Press button on the tailgate.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstan‐
ces:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 52.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with electronic devices.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to
page 53.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, it is possible to specify
whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐
locking with the remote control. Adjusting the
settings, refer to page 60.
The tailgate can only be opened if it is not
locked. Separately lock the tailgate, refer to
page 57.
Seite 56
Controls Opening and closing
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
During opening, the tailgate pivots back
and up. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
Opening and closing
Opening from the outside
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or
have the remote control with you.
Press button on the tailgate.
▷ Press button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may
also be unlocked. Unlocking with the re‐
mote control, refer to page 51.
The tailgate opens slightly and can be swung
upward.
Opening from the inside
With the vehicle stationary, press the
button in the driver's floor area.
Closing
Grasp the recess grip and pull tailgate down.
Locking separately
General information
The switch in the glove compartment decou‐
ples the tailgate from the central locking sys‐
tem, so it can no longer be opened.
If the glove compartment is locked with the
integrated key, the remote control can be
handed over without the integrated key, for in‐
stance to a valet parking service. It is then no
longer possible for objects to be removed from
the cargo area even with the remote control.
Securing
▷ Tailgate secured, arrow 1.
▷ Tailgate not secured, ar‐
row 2.
Slide the switch into the desired position.
Seite 57
Opening and closing Controls
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Trunk emergency unlocking
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The tailgate unlocks.
Driver profile
Concept
In the driver profiles, individual settings for
several drivers can be stored and called up
again when required.
General information
There are three driver profiles with which per‐
sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐
mote control has one of these driver profiles
assigned.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
trol, the assigned personal driver profile will be
activated. All settings stored in the driver pro‐
file are automatically applied.
If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings
during unlocking. These settings are also re‐
stored, if the vehicle has been used in the
meantime by a person with a different remote
control.
Changes to the settings are automatically
stored in the driver profile currently activated.
If another driver profile is selected via iDrive,
the settings stored in it will be applied auto‐
matically. The new driver profile is assigned to
the remote control currently used.
There is an additional guest profile available
that is not assigned to any remote control. It
can be used to apply settings in the vehicle
without changing the personal driver profiles.
Functional requirements
For the system to be able to identify the driver
profile associated to a particular driver, the de‐
tected remote control must be clearly allo‐
cated to the driver.
This is the case when:
▷ The driver is only carrying his or her own
remote control.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle.
▷ The driver gets into the vehicle through the
driver's door.
Settings
The settings for the following systems and
functions are stored in the active profile. The
scope of storable settings depends on country
and equipment.
▷ Unlocking and locking.
▷ Lights.
▷ Climate control.
▷ Radio.
▷ Instrument cluster.
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
▷ Volumes, tone.
▷ Control Display.
▷ Navigation.
▷ TV.
▷ PDC Park Distance Control.
▷ Rearview camera.
▷ Driving Dynamics Control.
▷ Driver's seat position, exterior mirror posi‐
tion, steering wheel position if applicable.
Both the positions saved via the seat mem‐
ory and the last position set are saved.
▷ Intelligent Safety.
Seite 58
Controls Opening and closing
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Profile management
Selecting a driver profile
Regardless of the remote control in use, a dif‐
ferent driver profile may be activated. This al‐
lows you to call up personal vehicle settings,
even if you did not unlock the vehicle with your
own remote control.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
4. "OK"
▷ All settings stored in the called-up driver
profile are automatically applied.
▷ The called-up driver profile is assigned to
the remote control being used at the time.
▷ If the driver profile is already assigned to a
different remote control, this driver profile
will apply to both remote controls.
Using a guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings that
are stored in none of the three personal driver
profiles.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Drive off (guest)"
4. "OK"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
assigned to the current remote control.
Renaming a driver profile
A personal name can be assigned to the active
driver profile to avoid confusion between the
driver profiles.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be renamed.
4. "Change driver profile name"
5. Enter profile name.
6. Select the symbol.
Resetting a driver profile
The settings of the driver profile currently in
use are reset to their factory settings.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be reset.
4. "Reset driver profile"
5. "OK"
Exporting driver profiles
Most settings of the active driver profile can be
exported.
Exporting is helpful when storing and retrieving
personal settings, for instance before deliver‐
ing the vehicle to a workshop. The stored
driver profiles can be taken into another vehi‐
cle.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be exported.
4. "Export driver profile"
5. Select a storage device for exporting the
driver profile.
▷ "USB device"
Select USB storage device, as needed,
refer to page 39.
Seite 59
Opening and closing Controls
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ Online.
Importing driver profiles
The existing settings of the active driver profile
are overwritten with the settings of the im‐
ported driver profile.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select the driver profile to be overwritten.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be overwritten.
4. "Import driver profile"
5. Select a storage device for importing the
driver profile.
▷ USB storage device: "USB device"
Select USB storage device as needed.
▷ Online.
6. Select the driver profile to be imported.
Displaying driver profiles during start
The driver profiles can be displayed during
each start to select the desired profile.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Show driver profiles at startup"
System limits
A clear assignment between the remote con‐
trol and driver may not be possible in the fol‐
lowing cases, for example.
▷ The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his
or her own remote control, but another
person is driving.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
Access and has multiple remote controls
with him or her.
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
locked and unlocked.
▷ Multiple remote controls are located out‐
side of the vehicle.
Settings
General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, various settings for open‐
ing and closing are possible.
These settings are stored for the driver profile,
refer to page 58, currently used.
Unlocking
Doors
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Tailgate
Depending on optional features and country
version, this setting is not offered in some
cases.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Tailgate" or "Tailgate and
door(s)"
5. Select desired setting:
Seite 60
Controls Opening and closing
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ "Tailgate"
The tailgate unlocks.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
The tailgate and the doors are un‐
locked.
Adjusting the last seat and mirror
position
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The setting can be made for the driver
profile marked with this symbol.
4. "Last seat position automatic"
When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's seat
and exterior mirrors resume their last set posi‐
tions.
The most recent position is independent of the
positions saved via the seat memory.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
mation signals.
▷ "Flash for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
locking by one.
▷ With alarm system:
"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of
the horn.
Automatic locking
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Select desired setting:
▷ "Lock automatically"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if no door is
opened after unlocking.
▷ "Lock after starting to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off.
Alarm system
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes:
▷ Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood
or the tailgate.
▷ Movements in the car's interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
the vehicle.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
The alarm system signals these changes visu‐
ally and acoustically:
▷ Acoustic alarm.
Depending on local regulations, the acous‐
tic alarm may be suppressed.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
Switching on/off
When you lock and unlock the vehicle with the
remote control or with Comfort Access, the
alarm system is switched on/off at the same
time.
Seite 61
Opening and closing Controls
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Opening the doors with the alarm
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door is
opened if the door was unlocked using the
integrated key in the door lock.
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 63.
Opening the tailgate with the alarm
system switched on
The tailgate can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
monitored again provided the doors are
locked. The hazard warning system flashes
once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press button on the remote con‐
trol and hold for at least 3 sec‐
onds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐
trol three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Indicator light on the interior mirror
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 sec‐
onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
access points are secured.
When the still open access points are
closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
sensor will be switched on.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlock‐
ing:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking
until the engine ignition is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi‐
cle is towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthor‐
ized action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐
cles, at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion
sensor can be switched off in such situations.
Seite 62
Controls Opening and closing
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor are turned off until the vehicle is locked
again.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle with the remote control
or switch on the ignition, if needed through
emergency detection of remote control, re‐
fer to page 53.
▷ With Comfort Access:
If you are carrying the remote control on
your person, grasp the door handle on the
driver's or front passenger door com‐
pletely.
Power windows
Safety information
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
Overview
Power windows
Opening
▷
Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is be‐
ing held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐
fer to page 51.
Closing
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is be‐
ing held.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically if the
door is closed. Pulling again stops the mo‐
tion.
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 55.
Seite 63
Opening and closing Controls
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Pinch protection system
General information
If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as
a window closes, closing is interrupted.
The window opens slightly.
Safety information
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such as an‐
tennas can impact jam protection. There is a
risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the
area of movement of the windows.◀
Closing without the jam protection
system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance
point and hold it there.
The window closes with limited jam pro‐
tection . If the closing force exceeds a spe‐
cific threshold, closing is interrupted.
2.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds and
hold it there.
The window closes without jam protec‐
tion .
Glass sunroof, electric
General information
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be
operated together or separately using the
same switch.
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
tion is switched on.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀
Overview
Tilting the glass sunroof
Push switch briefly upward.
▷ The closed glass sunroof
tilts.
▷ The opened glass sunroof
closes until it is in the tilted
position. The sliding visor
does not move.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sliding visor together
▷ Press the switch in the de‐
sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
Glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor open together while the
switch is being held.
The glass sunroof closes
while the switch is being
held. The sliding visor can
be manually closed.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
Seite 64
Controls Opening and closing
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
The glass sunroof and sliding visor open
automatically.
The glass sunroof closes automatically.
The sliding visor can be manually closed.
Pressing the switch upward stops the mo‐
tion.
Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐
fer to page 51.
Closing by means of Comfort Access, refer to
page 55.
Comfort position
If the glass sunroof is not completely opened
automatically, the comfort position has been
attained. In this position the wind noises in the
interior are the least.
If desired, continue the movement by pressing
the switch.
Jam protection system
General information
If the closing force exceeds a certain value
when closing the glass sunroof, the closing op‐
eration is interrupted once the roof reaches the
half-open position, or it is stopped when clos‐
ing from the tilted position. The glass sunroof
opens slightly.
Closing from the open position
without jam protection
If there is an external danger, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1.
Push the switch forward past the resist‐
ance point and hold.
The glass sunroof closes with limited jam
protection. If the closing force exceeds a
specific threshold, closing is interrupted.
2. Push the switch forward again past the re‐
sistance point and hold until the glass sun‐
roof closes without jam protection. Make
sure that the closing area is clear.
Closing from the raised position
without jam protection
If there is an external danger,
push the switch forward past the
resistance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes with‐
out jam protection.
Initializing after a power interruption
General information
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
operated to a limited extent.
The system can be initialized under the follow‐
ing conditions.
▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi‐
tion.
▷ The engine is running.
▷ The external temperature is above
41 ℉/5 ℃.
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Seite 65
Opening and closing Controls
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Initializing the system
Press the switch up and hold it
until the initialization is com‐
plete:
Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is completed
when the glass sunroof is completely closed.
Seite 66
Controls Opening and closing
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Settings
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Sitting safely
An ideal seating position that meets the needs
of the occupants can make a vital contribution
to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
In the event of an accident, the correct seating
position plays an important role. Additionally,
observe the following chapters for safe driving:
▷ Seats, refer to page 67.
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 71.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 72.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 117.
Seats
Safety information
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts can no longer be ensured. There is
a risk of sliding under the safety belt in an acci‐
dent. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust
the backrest so that it is in the most upright
position as possible and do not adjust again
while driving.◀
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Manually adjustable seats
Overview
1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Seat tilt
4 Backrest width
5 Lumbar support
6 Height
7 Backrest tilt
Seite 67
Settings Controls
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Forward/backward
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.
After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐
ward or back slightly making sure it engages
properly.
Height
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.
Backrest tilt
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Seat tilt
Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired
tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight
to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat
engages properly.
Electrically adjustable seats
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
for the profile currently used. When the vehicle
is unlocked via the remote control, the position
is automatically retrieved if the function, refer
to page 61, is activated for this purpose.
The current seat position can be stored using
the memory function, refer to page 74.
Overview
1 Memory function
2 Backrest width
3 Lumbar support
4 Backrest tilt
5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Seite 68
Controls Settings
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Forward/backward
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Push switch up or down.
Seat tilt
Move switch up or down.
Backrest tilt
Move switch forward or backward.
Thigh support
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the button:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the button:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Seite 69
Settings Controls
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Backrest width
General information
You can change the backrest width by adjust‐
ing the side wings of the backrest.
Settings
▷ Press the front section of
the button:
The backrest width de‐
creases.
▷ Press the rear section of the
button:
The backrest width in‐
creases.
Front seat heating
Overview
Seat heating
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes after a stop, seat heating is activated au‐
tomatically with the temperature selected last.
Switching off
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out.
Entering the rear
Safety information
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
WARNING
Unexpected movements of the backrest
while driving may occur due to an unlocked
backrest. Vehicle control could be lost. There
is a risk of injury. Fold back and lock the back‐
rests before driving.◀
Manual length adjustment
Comfort entry
The comfort entry contains a memory function
for forward/backward and backrest adjust‐
ment.
1.
Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Fold backrest forward.
3. Push the seat forward.
Seite 70
Controls Settings
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Original position
1. Push the seat back into the original posi‐
tion.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.
Electric forward/backward adjustment
Comfort entry
The comfort entry contains a memory function
for forward/backward and backrest adjust‐
ment.
1. Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Fold backrest forward.
3. To change the entry area:
▷ Press and hold this button until
the seat has moved to the de‐
sired position. Releasing the button
stops window/roof movement.
▷ Press button briefly. The seat au‐
tomatically moves to the end po‐
sition. Pressing again stops the motion.
Original position
1.
Moving the seat to its original position:
▷ Press and hold this button until
the seat has moved to its original
position. Releasing the button stops
window/roof movement.
▷ Press button briefly. The seat
moves to its original position.
Pressing again stops the motion.
2. Fold the backrest back.
Safety belts
Number of safety belts and safety belt
buckles
The vehicle is fitted with four safety belts to
ensure occupant safety. However, they can
only offer protection when adjusted correctly.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off. Al‐
though airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point
will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Safety information
WARNING
If the safety belt is used to buckle more
than one person, the efficacy of safety gear, in‐
cluding safety belts can no longer be ensured.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do
not allow more than one person to wear a sin‐
gle safety belt. Infants and children are not al‐
lowed on an occupant's lap, but must be trans‐
ported and secured in designated child
restraint systems.◀
WARNING
The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened safety belt can cause additional inju‐
ries, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure
that all occupants are wearing safety belts cor‐
rectly.◀
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐
ing situations:
Seite 71
Settings Controls
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any other
way.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety
belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt
retractors or belt anchors and keep them
clean. Have the safety belts checked after an
accident at the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to
your body over your lap and shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips
over your lap. The safety belt may not
press on your stomach.
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or
fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up‐
ward around your upper body.
Buckling the safety belt
1.
Slowly guide the safety belt out of the
holder when fastening it.
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt
buckle. The safety belt buckle must en‐
gage audibly.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
Safety belt reminder for driver's and
passenger's seat
Display
The indicator light lights up and a sig‐
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
belts are positioned correctly. The
safety belt reminder can also be activated if
objects are placed on the front passenger seat.
Front head restraints
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head re‐
straints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back of
the head. If necessary, adjust the distance
by adjusting the tilt of the backrest.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
Seite 72
Controls Settings
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.◀
Adjusting the height
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
head restraint down.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1.
Raise the head restraint up against the re‐
sistance.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Rear head restraints
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head re‐
straints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back of
the head. If necessary, adjust the distance
by adjusting the tilt of the backrest.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.◀
Seite 73
Settings Controls
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Height
Settings
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
Folding down the head restraint
Only fold the head restraint back if no one will
be sitting in the seat in question.
▷ To the back: press the button, arrow 1, and
fold the head restraint back, arrow 2.
▷ To the front: fold head restraint forward un‐
til the head restraint engages.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1.
Raise the head restraint up against the re‐
sistance.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Memory function
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory func‐
tion:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
General information
Two memory locations with different settings
can be set for each driver profile, refer to
page 58.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the fol‐
lowing settings are not stored:
▷ Backrest width.
▷ Lumbar support.
Safety information
WARNING
Using the memory function while driving
can lead to unexpected movements of the
seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of an accident. Only retrieve the memory
function when the vehicle is stationary.◀
Seite 74
Controls Settings
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Overview
Storing
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3.
Press button. The LED in the but‐
ton lights up.
4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED
is lit. The LED goes out.
Button was pressed inadvertently:
Press button again.
The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
The stored position is called up automatically.
Press selected button 1 or 2.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat or one of the memory buttons is
pressed.
While driving, the seat position adjustment on
the driver's side is interrupted after a short
time.
Calling up of a seat position
deactivated
After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐
tions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷ Open and close the door or tailgate.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
The mirror setting is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently in use. When the vehicle is un‐
locked via the remote control, the position is
automatically retrieved if the function, refer to
page 61, is activated for this purpose.
The current exterior mirror position can be
stored using the memory function, refer to
page 74.
Safety information
WARNING
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. The distance to the traffic
behind could be incorrectly estimated, for in‐
stance while changing lanes. There is a risk of
an accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic
behind by looking over your shoulder.◀
Seite 75
Settings Controls
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Overview
1 Settings
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Adjusting electrically
Press button.
The mirror movement follows the but‐
ton movement.
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror
glass.
Folding in and out
NOTE
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
hicle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There
is a risk of property damage. Before washing,
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀
Press button.
Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap‐
prox. 15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the
following situations:
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells in the interior
mirror are used to control this.
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior
mirror
Concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward.
This improves your view of the curb and other
low-lying obstacles when parking, for instance.
Activating
1. Slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger's
side mirror position.
Seite 76
Controls Settings
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Interior mirror, manually dimmable
Flip lever
To reduce the blinding effect of the interior
mirror, flip the lever forward.
Turn knob
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by
the interior mirror.
Interior mirror, automatic dimming
feature
Overview
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirements
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
Settings
1.
Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Seite 77
Settings Controls
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Heated steering wheel
Overview
Heated steering wheel
Switching on/off
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Seite 78
Controls Settings
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
The right place for children
Safety information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Always transport children in the rear
seat
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
Transport children younger than 13 years of
age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear
seat in suitable child restraint systems de‐
signed for the age, weight and size of the child.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
weight, and size.
Safety information
WARNING
The safety belt cannot be fastened cor‐
rectly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm
without suitable additional child restraint sys‐
tems. The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened safety belt can cause additional inju‐
ries, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Secure chil‐
dren shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable
child restraint systems.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
General information
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
straint system in the front passenger seat,
make sure that the front, knee and side airbags
on the front passenger side are deactivated.
Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐
ger airbags, refer to page 119.
Seite 79
Transporting children safely Controls
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Safety information
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
Installing child restraint
systems
General information
Pay attention to the specifications of the child
restraint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using child restraint systems.
Safety information
WARNING
The protective effect of damaged child
restraint systems or of child restraint systems
exposed to an accident and their fastening
systems can be limited or lost. A child can
e.g.,not sufficiently restrained, for instance in
the event of an accident or braking and evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger
to life. Have damaged child restraint systems
or of child restraint systems exposed to an ac‐
cident and their fastening systems checked
and possibly replaced by the dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
After installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
automatically, refer to page 119.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐
ble and bring it as far up as possible to obtain
the best possible position for the belt and to
offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐
dent.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐
Seite 80
Controls Transporting children safely
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
til the best possible belt guide position is
reached.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint system in the front passenger
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
ten child restraint systems.
Locking the safety belt
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull
it tight against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing system
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐
dren.
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐
mation of the child restraint system manufac‐
turer when installing and using LATCH child
restraint fixing systems.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Safety information
WARNING
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tems are not correctly engaged, the protective
effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tem can be limited. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the lower an‐
chors are securely engaged and that the
LATCH child restraint fixing system fits se‐
curely against the backrest.◀
Seite 81
Transporting children safely Controls
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Position
Symbol Meaning
The corresponding symbol
shows the mounts for the
lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower an‐
chors are marked with a pair,
2, of LATCH symbols.
Before installing LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
child restraint system.
Assembly of LATCH child restraint
fixing systems
1.
Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
turer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint systems with tether
strap
Safety information
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the protec‐
tive effect can be reduced. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not guided across sharp edges and without
twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀
WARNING
If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro‐
tective effect of the child restraint system is
limited or there is none. In particular situations,
for instance braking maneuvers or in case of an
accident, the rear backrest can fold forward.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
sure that the rear backrests are locked.◀
NOTE
The mounting points for the upper re‐
taining straps of child restraint systems are
only provided for these retaining straps. When
other objects are mounted, the anchors can be
damaged. There is a risk of property damage.
Only mount child restraint systems to the up‐
per retaining straps.◀
Anchors
The respective symbol shows the an‐
chor for the upper retaining strap.
Seats with an upper top tether are
marked with this symbol. It can be found on
the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
Routing the retaining strap
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Rear window shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the anchor
1.
Remove the anchor cover.
2. Raise the head restraint.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.
Seite 82
Controls Transporting children safely
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the anchor.
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
Seite 83
Transporting children safely Controls
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Start/Stop button
Concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off
and starts the engine.
M double-clutch transmission:
the engine starts with the brake
pedal pressed when you press the Start/Stop
button.
Manual transmission: the engine starts with
the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop
button is pressed.
Ignition on
M double-clutch transmission: press the Start/
Stop button, and do not press on the brake
pedal at the same time.
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but‐
ton without stepping on the clutch pedal.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the in‐
strument cluster light up for a varied length of
time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Ignition off
M double-clutch transmission: press the Start/
Stop button again without stepping on the
brake.
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but‐
ton again without stepping on the clutch pedal.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Safety measures
When switching off the ignition, the transmis‐
sion position P is selected automatically if the
selector lever position D or R is selected.
The ignition is switched off automatically in the
following situations while the vehicle is station‐
ary and the engine is off:
▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the
low beams are switched on.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the low beams are switched off.
▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
with driver's door open and low beams off.
The low beams switch to parking lights after
some minutes of no use.
Radio-ready state
General information
In the radio-ready state, certain power con‐
sumers remain ready for operation.
Seite 84
Controls Driving
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Activating
With the engine running, press the Start/Stop
button.
If the engine is not running and the ignition is
switched on: the system automatically acti‐
vates radio-ready state when the door is
opened if the lights are switched off or the day‐
time running lights are switched on.
The radio-ready state remains active if, for in‐
stance the ignition is automatically switched
off for the following reasons:
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door.
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
▷ When automatically switching from low
beams to parking lights.
Switching off automatically
The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐
cally in the following situations:
▷ If the ignition is switched off manually with
the Start/Stop button.
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐
tral locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
Starting the engine
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain pollutants which are colorless and odor‐
less. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
NOTE
In the case of repeated starting attempts
or repeated starting in quick succession, the
fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned.
The catalytic converter can overheat. There is
a risk of property damage. Avoid repeated
starting in quick succession.◀
M double-clutch transmission
Starting the engine
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Manual transmission
Starting the engine
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐
tral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine
starts.
Seite 85
Driving Controls
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Engine stop
Safety information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
M double-clutch transmission
Switching off the engine
1.
Apply the brakes until the vehicle comes to
a stop.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
3. Set the parking brake.
Manual transmission
Switching off the engine
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the
Start/Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function
Concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, for instance in traffic congestion or at
traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on.
The engine starts automatically for driving off.
The Auto Start/Stop function is only available
in the COMFORT or TRACTION driving pro‐
grams, refer to page 137.
General information
After every start of the engine using the Start/
Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in
the last selected state. When the Auto Start/
Stop function is active, it is available when the
vehicle is traveling faster than about
3 mph/5 km/h.
Engine stop
Functional requirements
The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
ing a stop under the following conditions:
M double-clutch transmission:
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while
the vehicle is stopped.
Seite 86
Controls Driving
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
Manual transmission:
▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is
not pressed.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The READY display in the tach‐
ometer signals that the Auto
Start/Stop function is ready to
start the engine automatically.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met.
Functional limitations
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷ In case of a steep downhill grade.
▷ External temperature too low.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated
or cooled to the required level.
▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐
ature.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensa‐
tion when the automatic climate control is
switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ At higher elevations.
▷ The hood is unlocked.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Starting the engine
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
▷ M double-clutch transmission: by releasing
the brake pedal.
▷ Manual transmission: clutch pedal is
pressed.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met:
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied
length of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
Functional limitations
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior
when the air conditioning is switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Double-clutch transmission: change from
selector lever position D to N, R or D/S.
▷ M double-clutch transmission: accelerat‐
ing while simultaneously applying the
brake.
▷ The vehicle begins rolling.
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensa‐
tion when the automatic climate control is
switched on.
Seite 87
Driving Controls
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
the heating is switched on.
▷ Low brake vacuum pressure; this can oc‐
cur, for instance if the brake pedal is de‐
pressed a number of times in succession.
Preventing an automatic engine stop
with aM double-clutch transmission
Concept
To make it possible to drive off very quickly,
such as at an intersection, the automatic en‐
gine stop can be actively prevented.
Preventing an engine stop using the
brake pedal
The engine stop can be actively prevented
within one second after the vehicle comes to a
standstill:
▷ Immediately after the vehicle comes to a
standstill, briefly press the brake pedal
forcefully.
▷ Then press the brake pedal with normal
braking force.
Activating/deactivating the system
manually
Using the button
Press button.
▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is
activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, for instance
when leaving it.
M double-clutch transmission:
1.
Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐
matically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Manual transmission:
1.
Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐
sons, e.g., if no driver is detected.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the system checked by
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 88
Controls Driving
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Parking brake
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Applying
The lever automatically engages after being
pulled up.
The indicator lamp lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
models
If for once use during driving is required, en‐
gage the parking brake slightly and hold the
button down.
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake ac‐
tion, lightly apply the parking brake periodically
while coasting, if traffic conditions permit.
The brake lights will not light up if the parking
brake is set.
Releasing
Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide
the lever down.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlight flasher
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights
on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Using turn signals
Press the lever past the resistance point.
Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated.
Seite 89
Driving Controls
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
6. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
Malfunction
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
High beams, headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
them to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Switching on
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Intermittent operation or rain sensor, posi‐
tion 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
When travel is interrupted with the wiper sys‐
tem switched on: when travel continues, the
wipers resume at their previous speed.
Seite 90
Controls Driving
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down.
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
reaches its standard position.
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
standard position.
The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released.
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di‐
rectly in front of the interior mirror. Without the
rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper opera‐
tion is preset.
Safety information
NOTE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle
washes. There is a risk of property damage.
Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.◀
Activating/deactivating
Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐
tion, arrow 1.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency
or sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Windshield and headlight
washer system
Safety information
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use
Seite 91
Driving Controls
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.◀
NOTE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not use
the washer system when the washer fluid res‐
ervoir is empty.◀
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐
lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are
switched on.
Windshield washer nozzles
The washer jets are automatically heated
whenever the ignition is switched on.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The wipers can be folded away from the wind‐
shield in the fold-away position.
General information
Important, e.g., when changing the wiper
blades or when folding out under frosty condi‐
tions.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Folding away the wipers
1.
Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press and hold the wiper level down, until
the wipers stop in a close to vertical posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the
windshield.
Seite 92
Controls Driving
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
shield.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to
their resting position and are ready again
for operation.
Washer fluid
General information
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
ervoir.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
washer concentrate containing antifreeze can
be used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain
harmful substances and are flammable. There
is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Observe the
instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐
ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐
erating materials out of reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen‐
trate or the equivalent is recommended.◀
WARNING
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on
contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐
ervoir.◀
NOTE
Silicon-containing additives in the
washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on
the windows can lead to damage to the wash‐
ing system. There is a risk of property damage.
Do not add silicon-containing additives to the
washer fluid.◀
NOTE
Mixing different windshield washer con‐
centrates or antifreeze can damage the wash‐
ing system. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not mix different windshield washer
concentrates or antifreeze. Follow the informa‐
tion and mixing ratios provided on the contain‐
ers.◀
Overview
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐
gine compartment.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer con‐
centrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead
to incorrect readings at temperatures below
+5 ℉/-15 ℃.
Seite 93
Driving Controls
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Manual transmission
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
NOTE
When shifting to a lower gear, excessive
speeds can damage the engine. There is a risk
of property damage. When shifting into 5th or
6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the
right.◀
Schematic diagram
▷ 1 – 6: forward gears
▷ R: reverse
Shifting
General information
Depending on the engine installation, the en‐
gine speed during a shifting operation is ad‐
justed automatically as required for harmo‐
nious and dynamic gear shifting.
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
To overcome the resistance push the gearshift
lever dynamically to the left and engage re‐
verse gear with a forward shifting movement.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
its own power, for instance in a vehicle wash,
or be pushed.
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift out of a
forward gear or reverse.
3. Release the parking brake.
M double-clutch
transmission with Drivelogic
General information
The M double-clutch transmission with Drive‐
logic is an automatic shift transmission with
two clutches and partial transmissions in which
the gears can be changed without interrupting
the tractive force.
The operation is via the selector lever or two
shift paddles on the steering wheel.
Functions
▷ Drive mode or Sequential mode.
▷ Various drive programs, Drivelogic.
▷ Automatic downshifting and protection
from misshifting even in sequential mode.
▷ Launch Control.
▷ Low Speed Assistant.
Seite 94
Controls Driving
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Selector lever, selector lever positions
Overview
▷ R: reverse gear.
▷ N: neutral.
▷ Center position, forward position.
▷ +: manual upshifting.
▷ -: manual downshifting.
▷ D/S: switch between drive mode and se‐
quential mode.
Engaging a selector lever position
Press on the brake pedal and pull or push the
selector lever in the corresponding direction.
As soon as the selector lever is released, it re‐
verts to the center position. In position R, the
selector lever locks.
The engaged selector lever position is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster and on the se‐
lector lever.
If a selector lever position is engaged, the vehi‐
cle may start rolling, after the brake is released,
for instance on downhill slopes. Thus, drive off
immediately after releasing the brake.
Use the Slow Speed Assistant for maneuver‐
ing and during stop-and-go traffic.
Low Speed Assistant
Concept
The Low Speed Assistant gives assistance at
very low speeds. The vehicle moves at walking
speed.
This can also be used for rocking the vehicle in
the snow. To do this, switch between reverse
gear and forward gear without stepping on the
brakes in the process.
Safety information
NOTE
When using the function and simultane‐
ously stepping on the brake pedal for a longer
time, the transmission can overheat. There is a
risk of property damage. When using the func‐
tion, do not brake for a longer period.◀
Activating
1.
Engage a driving position.
2. Briefly tap the accelerator pedal.
In 1st and 2nd gear and in reverse, the vehicle
rolls at minimum speed.
Deactivating
Apply the brakes until the vehicle comes to a
stop.
Flashing display on the selector lever
of the double clutch transmission
The actually engaged transmission position
can deviate from the selector lever position in
Seite 95
Driving Controls
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
some situations. The display in the selector
lever flashes.
Observe the display in the instrument cluster
in these cases.
D is Drive mode
In Drive mode, all forward gears are automati‐
cally changed.
Kickdown: for maximum acceleration, for in‐
stance when passing. To do this, depress the
accelerator pedal past the resistance point.
Switch to Sequential mode: shift using the
shift paddles or the selector lever, or push the
selector lever in the D/S direction.
S is Sequential mode
Use the shift paddles or the selector lever to
upshift or downshift without letting off the gas.
▷ Shortly before falling below a gear-de‐
pendent minimum speed, the transmission
is automatically downshifted.
▷ Upshifting or downshifting is done only if
the rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate.
E.g., there is no downshifting if the engine
speed is too high.
▷ Kickdown: the lowest possible gear is se‐
lected by simultaneously operating the
kickdown and the left shift paddle or selec‐
tor lever.
▷ It is also possible to start out in 2nd gear,
for instance on icy roads.
Switch to Drive mode: push selector lever in
D/S direction.
Reverse R
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
It is also possible to rock the vehicle up to
6 mph/10 km/h. To do this, switch between
forward gear and reverse gear without step‐
ping on the brakes in the process.
N is Neutral
The vehicle may roll in selector lever posi‐
tion N, for instance in vehicle washes, refer to
page 225.
P Park
The drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically:
▷ After the engine is switched off when the
vehicle is in radio-ready state, refer to
page 84, or when the ignition is switched
off, refer to page 84, and when position R
or D is set.
▷ With the ignition is off, if position N is set.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
General information
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
its own power for a short distance, for instance
in a vehicle wash, or be pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N
1.
Start the engine while pressing on the
brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Engage selector lever position N.
5. Switch the engine off.
In this way, the ignition remains switched
on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐
played.
The vehicle may roll.
NOTE
Selector lever position P is automatically
engaged when the ignition is switched off.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not
switch drive-ready state off in vehicle
washes.◀
Irrespective of the ignition, the selector lever
position P is automatically engaged after ap‐
prox. 15 minutes.
Seite 96
Controls Driving
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is dis‐
played, for example: P.
Information
When the external temperature is very low, the
display may not work. Current driving direction
is recognizable at the engaged selector lever
position.
Gear change
General information
Shifting in Sequential mode possible.
A shift in Drive mode causes a switch to Se‐
quential mode.
Using the selector lever
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
wards.
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
Using the shift paddles on the steering
wheel
▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
Drivelogic
Concept
Using Drivelogic, the characteristics of the hy‐
brid system can be adjusted. For this purpose,
different driving programs are available in Drive
and Sequential mode.
The driving programs can be programmed us‐
ing Driving Dynamics Control.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Driving programs
Drive mode
Choice of three driving programs:
▷ COMFORT: efficient driving.
▷ SPORT: sporty driving.
▷ SPORT+: consistently sporty driving.
Sequential mode
Choice of three driving programs:
▷ COMFORT: comfortable shifting opera‐
tions.
▷ SPORT: sporty, fast shifting operations.
▷ SPORT+: maximum shifting speed, Launch
Control, refer to page 98.
Activating
Activate program via the Driving Dynamics
Control, refer to page 137, button.
Seite 97
Driving Controls
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Launch Control
Concept
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction.
General information
The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents
a very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 173, period.
Requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Activate Launch Control
1.
Deactivate Dynamic Stability Control, refer
to page 135.
2. Select Sequential mode with gear 1.
3. With the engine running, apply the brake
with the left foot.
4. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
The starting engine speed adjusts.
5. If necessary, change the starting engine
speed by 500 rpm via cruise control.
6. Release the brake, the vehicle accelerates.
Continue to depress the accelerator pedal.
Upshifting occurs automatically as long as
the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
Launch Control is available again only after a
certain distance has been driven.
System limits
This transmission has an overheating protec‐
tion mechanism, which protects the clutch
from extreme stress.
▷ Indicator lamp lights up yellow:
transmission too hot.
Avoid high engine stress and fre‐
quent starts.
▷ Indicator lamp lights up red: transmission
is overheating.
Further driving at a moderate pace is pos‐
sible. At the next opportunity, stop the ve‐
hicle, shut off the engine and allow the
transmission to cool down.
Avoid fast starts, and on inclines did not accel‐
erate lightly while letting the clutch slip; other‐
wise, the transmission may overheat.
During traffic jams or at very low speeds, use
the Low Speed Assistant, refer to page 95.
Seite 98
Controls Driving
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Displays
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Speedometer
2 Messages, for instance Check Control
3 Tachometer 103
4 Current fuel consumption
5 Electronic displays
6 Fuel gauge 103
7 Reset miles 103
Check Control
Concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
in the monitored systems.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights and
SMS text messages in the instrument cluster.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and
an SMS text message may appear on the Con‐
trol Display.
Seite 99
Displays Controls
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Indicator/warning lights
General information
The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐
nations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Red lights
Safety belt reminder
Safety belt on the driver's side is not
buckled. For some country-specific
models: passenger belt is not worn or
objects are detected on the front passenger
seat.
Indicator lamp flashes or is illuminated: safety
belt on the driver or passenger side is not
buckled. The safety belt reminder can also be
activated if objects are placed on the front pas‐
senger seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner are
not working.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
Release the parking brake, refer to
page 89.
Approach control warning
Indicator light illuminates: advance
warning is issued, for example when
there is the impending danger of a col‐
lision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is
too small.
Increase distance.
Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the im‐
minent danger of a collision when the vehicle
approaches another vehicle at a relatively high
differential speed.
Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐
neuver.
Person warning
Symbol in the instrument cluster.
If a collision with a person detected in
this way is imminent, the symbol lights
up and a signal sounds.
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Braking force boost may not be work‐
ing. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the lon‐
ger braking distance into account.
Have the system immediately checked
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The indicator light flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive and braking forces. The
vehicle is stabilized. Reduce speed and
modify your driving style to the driving circum‐
stances.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐
tioned.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Seite 100
Controls Displays
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
page 135.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control deactivated
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deac‐
tivated.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
page 135.
M Dynamic Mode MDM
M Dynamic Mode MDM is switched on.
M Dynamic Mode, refer to page 136.
Indicator light also flashes: MDM con‐
trols the drive and braking forces. The
vehicle is stabilized.
The indicator light illuminates: MDM
has malfunctioned. Have the system
checked by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
M Dynamic Mode, refer to page 136.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cau‐
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐
neuvers.
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 124.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The indicator light illuminates.
The Tire Pressure Monitor reports a
low tire inflation pressure or a flat tire.
Follow the information in the Check Control
message.
The indicator light flashes and then illuminates
continuously.
No flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can
be detected.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 120.
Steering system
Steering system in some cases not
working.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
page 211.
Seite 101
Displays Controls
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Lane departure warning
System is switched on and under cer‐
tain circumstances warns if a detected
lane is left without flashing beforehand.
Lane departure warning, refer to page 132.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed.
Turn signal, refer to page 89.
Parking lights, headlight
Parking lights or headlights are
switched on.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are switched on and off
automatically depending on the traffic
situation.
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 114.
Cruise control
The system is switched on. It maintains
the speed that was set using the con‐
trol elements on the steering wheel.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are switched on.
High beams, refer to page 90.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Continuous display
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions
occur at once, the messages are displayed
consecutively.
These messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed
again automatically.
Temporary display
Other Check Control messages are hidden au‐
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. These
Check Control messages are stored and can
be displayed again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Display
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.
Seite 102
Controls Displays
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
SMS text messages
SMS text messages in combination with a
symbol in the instrument cluster explain a
Check Control message and the meaning of
the indicator/warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
an error or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Functions
Depending on the Check Control message, the
following functions can be selected.
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about the
Check Control message in the Integrated
Owner's Manual.
▷ "Service request"
Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
▷ "BMW Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after the ignition is switched
off.
Fuel gauge
Depending on the equipment
version, the arrow beside the
fuel pump symbol shows which
side of the vehicle the fuel filler
flap is on.
Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to
vary.
Information on refueling, refer to page 184.
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to
protect the engine.
Odometer and trip odometer
Display
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Show/reset miles
Press the button.
▷ When the ignition is
switched off, the time, the
external temperature and
the odometer are displayed.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
External temperature
WARNING
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, e.g., on bridges
or shady sections of road. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust your driving style to the
weather conditions at low temperatures.◀
If the indicator drops to
+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal
sounds.
A Check Control message is
displayed.
Seite 103
Displays Controls
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Time
The time is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
The time can be set on the Con‐
trol Display.
Date
The date is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
The date can be set on the Con‐
trol Display.
Range
Display
With a low remaining range:
▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is
shown on the Onboard
Computer.
▷ With a dynamic driving style, for instance
taking curves aggressively, the engine
function is not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
NOTE
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of property
damage. Refuel promptly.◀
Current fuel consumption
Instrument cluster
Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. Check whether you
are currently driving in an effi‐
cient and environmentally-
friendly manner.
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the current fuel consumption can also be dis‐
played as bar in the instrument cluster.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Additional indicators"
Energy recovery
Display
The kinetic energy of the vehicle
is converted to electrical energy
while the vehicle is coasting.
The vehicle battery is partially
charged and fuel consumption
can be reduced.
EfficientDynamics display
Displaying Efficient Dynamics
Information on fuel consumption and technol‐
ogy can be displayed while driving.
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
Seite 104
Controls Displays
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Displaying fuel consumption history
The average fuel consumption can be dis‐
played within an adjustable time frame.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
4. Select the symbol.
Selecting route length
1.
Press button.
2. Select desired route length or scaling.
Resetting fuel consumption history
1. Press button.
2. "Reset consumption history"
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
The current efficiency can be displayed.
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
4. Select the symbol.
The following systems are displayed:
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Climate control output.
Service requirements
Concept
The function displays the service requirements
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
General information
After the ignition is turned on the instrument
cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐
nance.
A service advisor can read out the current
service requirements from your remote con‐
trol.
Display
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently re‐
quired.
The deadline for scheduled
maintenance or a legally man‐
dated inspection is approach‐
ing.
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐
spections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
Seite 105
Displays Controls
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Select the desired setting.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections is automatically
transmitted to your dealer’s service center be‐
fore a service due date.
You can check when your dealer’s service cen‐
ter was notified.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Teleservice Call"
Gear shift indicator
Concept
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
cient gear for the current driving situation.
General information
The gear shift indicator is active in the sequen‐
tial mode of the M double clutch transmission
and for the manual transmission.
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed.
Manual transmission: displaying
Symbol Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift up to fuel efficient gear.
Shift down to fuel efficient gear.
Shift into neutral.
M double-clutch transmission:
displaying
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info
Concept
Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum
permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
General information
The camera in the area of the interior mirror
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as
well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic
signs with extra symbols for wet road condi‐
tions, etc., are also detected and compared
with the vehicle's onboard data, such as from
the rain sensor, and will be displayed depend‐
ing on the situation. The system takes into ac‐
Seite 106
Controls Displays
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
count the information stored in the navigation
system and also displays speed limits present
on routes without signs.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
Overview
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, Speed
Limit Info is active every time the vehicle drives
off and is displayed on the instrument cluster
automatically. Otherwise, Speed Limit Info is
available via the Onboard Computer and can
be switched on separately.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Speed limit information"
If Speed Limit Info is switched on, it can be dis‐
played on the Info Display in the instrument
cluster via the Onboard Computer.
Display
The following is displayed in the instrument
cluster:
Speed Limit Info
Current speed limit.
Speed Limit Info not available.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in road routing.
Seite 107
Displays Controls
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road
are detected.
Selection lists
General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following can be displayed or operated using
the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steer‐
ing wheel and the display in the instrument
cluster:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
It also displays programs of the Driving Dy‐
namics Control.
Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
list.
1.
Turn the thumbwheel and select the de‐
sired setting.
2. Press the thumbwheel.
Display
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the list in the instrument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown.
Onboard Computer
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different ve‐
hicle data in the instrument cluster, such as
average values.
Calling up information on the Info
Display
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Information is displayed in the Info Display of
the instrument cluster. Pressing the button re‐
peatedly displays additional information.
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn
signal lever calls up the following information in
the Info Display:
Seite 108
Controls Displays
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ Range.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Current consumption, fuel.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Engine temperature display.
▷ Speed Limit Info.
▷ Depending on the equipment, the time of
arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Depending on the equipment, the distance
to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
Selecting information
You can select what information from the On‐
board Computer is to be displayed on the Info
Display of the instrument cluster.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. Select the desired information.
Indication in the Info Display
The information from the On‐
board Computer is shown in the
Info Display in the instrument
cluster.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
The range is calculated based on your driving
style over the last 20 miles/30 km.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the period while the engine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the distance traveled since the last reset by the
Onboard Computer.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped are not included in
the calculation of the average speed.
Resetting average values
Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
Engine temperature display
Displays the current engine temperature,
based on a combination of coolant and engine
oil temperature. As soon as the optimum oper‐
ating temperature has been attained, the indi‐
cator is in the center position.
If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the en‐
gine, become too hot, a Check Control mes‐
sage is displayed too.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 208.
Distance to destination
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the dis‐
tance remaining to the destination is displayed
if a destination is entered in the navigation sys‐
tem before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
tomatically.
Seite 109
Displays Controls
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Time of arrival
Depending on the vehicle equip‐
ment, the estimated time of ar‐
rival is displayed if a destination
is entered in the navigation sys‐
tem before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Speed Limit Info
Further information, see chapter Speed Limit
Info.
Onboard Computer on the Control
Display
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different ve‐
hicle data on the Control Display, such as aver‐
age values.
General information
Two types of Onboard Computers are availa‐
ble on the Control Display:
▷ "Onboard info": average values, such as
the fuel consumption, are displayed. The
values can be reset individually.
▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an
overview of a certain distance and can be
reset as often as necessary.
Calling up the Onboard Computer or
trip computer
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the Onboard Computer
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info"
4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
5. "OK"
Resetting the trip computer
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip computer"
4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
▷ "Reset": all values are reset.
▷ "Automatic reset": all values are
reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle
has come to a standstill.
Sport displays
General information
On the Control Display, the current values for
performance and torque can be displayed if
the vehicle is appropriately equipped.
Displaying sport displays
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Sport displays"
Speed warning
Concept
A speed limit can be set that when reached will
cause a warning to be issued.
General information
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
exceeds the set speed limit again, after it has
dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
Seite 110
Controls Displays
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Displaying, setting or changing the
speed warning
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Warning at:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed
is displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
Activating/deactivating the speed
warning
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Speed warning"
5. Press the Controller.
Setting your current speed as the
speed warning
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Select current speed"
5. Press the Controller.
Vehicle status
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per‐
formed for several systems.
Opening the vehicle status
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
Information at a glance
▷ "Flat Tire Monitor": Status of the Flat
Tire Monitor, refer to page 124.
▷ "Tire Pressure Monitor": Status of the
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 121.
▷ Resetting the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer
to page 121.
▷ "Engine oil level": Electronic engine
oil level check, refer to page 204.
▷ "Check Control": Check Control mes‐
sages are stored in the background and
can be displayed on the Control Display.
Displaying stored Check Control mes‐
sages, refer to page 102.
▷ "Service required": Displaying serv‐
ice requirements, refer to page 105.
▷ "Teleservice Call": service request.
Seite 111
Displays Controls
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Lights
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Overview
Switches in the vehicle
The light switch element is located next to the
steering wheel.
Symbol Function
Automatic headlight control.
Adaptive light functions.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Symbol Function
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Parking lights, cornering
lights and roadside parking
lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver's door is opened when the ignition
is switched off, the exterior lighting is automat‐
ically switched off.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery
and it would then be impossible to start the en‐
gine.
Canada: when parking, switch on the one-
sided roadside parking light, refer to
page 112.
Low beams
Position of switch:
The low beams light up when the ignition is
switched on.
Canada: roadside parking light
Concept
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Seite 112
Controls Lights
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Switching on
With radio-ready state switched off, press the
lever either up or down past the resistance
point.
Switching off
Press the lever back into the standard position.
Welcome lamps and
headlamp courtesy delay
feature
Welcome lamps
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the
ambient brightness, individual light functions
may be switched on briefly when the vehicle is
unlocked.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch:
,
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Welcome lights"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
General information
The low beams stay illuminated for a particular
time if the high beams are switched on after
radio-ready state is switched off.
Setting the duration
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Set length of time.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Automatic headlight control
Concept
The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
matically depending on the ambient bright‐
ness, for instance in tunnels, in twilight or if
there is precipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
When emerging from a tunnel during the day,
the low beams are not switched off immedi‐
ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.
Activating
Position of switch:
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
illuminated when the low beams are switched
on.
Seite 113
Lights Controls
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot serve
as a substitute for your personal judgment of
lighting conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks un‐
der these conditions, you should always switch
on the lights manually.
Daytime running lights
General information
Position of switch:
, ,
The daytime running lights light up when the
ignition is switched on. After the ignition is
switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐
tion .
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Adaptive Light Control
Concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
General information
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlight follows
the course of the road.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Activating
Position of switch:
Adaptive Headlight Control is active when the
engine is running.
Adaptive headlight range
control
The adaptive headlight range control compen‐
sates for acceleration and braking operations
in order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to
achieve optimum illumination of the roadway.
High-beam Assistant
Concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
participants early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depending
on the traffic situation.
General information
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high
beams are switched on, whenever the traffic
situation allows. In the low speed range, the
high beams are not switched on by the system.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, for instance in towns
and cities.
The high beams can be switched on and off at
any time as usual.
Seite 114
Controls Lights
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch, depending on the vehicle
equipment: ,
Press and hold button on signal lever.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low
beams are switched on.
The headlights are automatically switched be‐
tween low beams and high beams.
The blue indicator light in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when
manually switching the high beams on and off,
refer to page 90.
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press
the button on the turn signal lever.
System limits
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judgment of
when to use the high beams. In situation that
require this, therefore switch off manually.
The system is not fully functional in the follow‐
ing situations, and driver intervention may be
necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
coming traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Instrument lighting
Functional requirement
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness.
Settings
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Interior lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, the interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lamps, and cour‐
tesy lamps are controlled automatically.
Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐
trols brightness of some of these features.
Seite 115
Lights Controls
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Overview
1 Interior lights
2 Reading lights
Switching the interior lights on/off
Press button.
To switch off permanently: press the button
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Switching the reading lights on/off
Press button.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
reading lights are located next to the interior
lights in the front and rear.
Ambient light
General information
Depending on the equipment version, lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's in‐
terior.
Selecting color scheme
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Ambient lighting"
6. Select the desired setting.
Setting the brightness
Depending on the equipment, the brightness
of the ambient light can be adjusted via the
thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on
the Control Display.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Adjust the brightness.
Seite 116
Controls Lights
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Safety
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbag
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and the
front passenger by responding to frontal im‐
pacts in which safety belts alone would not
provide adequate protection.
Side airbag
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
Seite 117
Safety Controls
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side
impact events.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information on optimum effect of the
airbags
WARNING
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐
ployment area of the airbags is impaired, the
airbag system cannot provide protection as in‐
tended and may cause additional injuries due
to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐
ger to life. Follow the information on achieving
the optimum protective effect of the airbag
system.◀
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐
gered.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
legs in the floor area and does not support
them on the dashboard.
▷ There should be no additional persons, an‐
imals or objects between an airbag and a
person.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front
passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
not attach brackets or cables, for instance
for GPS devices or mobile phones.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or
modify them in any way.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not specifically suited for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
ties may affect the air bag system; contact
BMW Customer Relations for further informa‐
tion.
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
Safety information
WARNING
Individual components can be hot after
triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk
of injury. Do not touch individual compo‐
nents.◀
Seite 118
Controls Safety
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
WARNING
Improperly executed work can lead to
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
tion, the airbag system might not trigger as in‐
tended despite the accident severity. There is
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Have the air‐
bag system checked, repaired, dismantled and
scrapped by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Correct function
When the ignition is switched on, the
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up briefly and thereby indicates
the operational readiness of the entire airbag
system and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the
ignition is turned on.
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
Automatic deactivation of the front-
seat passenger airbags
Concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐
sistance.
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐
vated.
General information
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
Safety information
WARNING
To ensure the front-seat passenger air‐
bag function, the system must be able to de‐
tect whether a person is sitting in the front
passenger seat. The entire seat cushion area
must be used for this purpose. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the
front passenger keeps his or her feet in the
floor area.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically determined to
be safe for use on the front passenger
seat.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
passenger seat if a child restraint system is
to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Seite 119
Safety Controls
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Indicator lamp for the front-seat
passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐
ger airbags indicates the operating state of the
front-seat passenger airbags.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
ther activated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system or when the seat
is empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not
activated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient
size is detected on the seat. The airbags
on the front passenger side are activated.
Detected child restraint systems
The system generally detects children seated
in a child restraint system, particularly in child
restraint systems required by NHTSA at the
point in time when the vehicle was manufac‐
tured. After installing a child restraint system,
make sure that the indicator light for the front-
seat passenger airbags lights up. This indi‐
cates that the child restraint system has been
detected and the front-seat passenger airbags
are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front-seat
passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front-seat passenger airbags very much de‐
pends on the positions of the driver's/front
passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon
as a respective message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
Calibrating the front seats
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
A corresponding message appears on the
Control Display.
1.
Press the switch and move the respective
seat all the way forward, until it stops.
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat
still moves forward slightly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the message on the Control Display disap‐
pears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re‐
peat calibration, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
the four mounted tires. The system warns you
if there is a significant loss of pressure in one
or more tires.
Seite 120
Controls Safety
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
General information
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire in‐
flation pressure and, depending on the model,
the tire temperature.
With use of the system follow further informa‐
tion found under Tire inflation pressure, refer
to page 188.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for the
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset
was performed with the correct tire infla‐
tion pressure.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐
justed to a new value, a reset was per‐
formed.
▷ Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.
Status display
Current status
The system status can be displayed on the
Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys‐
tem is active.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The current status is displayed.
Tire conditions
General information
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the wheels and a SMS text message
on the Control Display.
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning re‐
lated to the tire inflation pressures stored dur‐
ing the last reset.
One to four yellow wheels
A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation
pressure has occurred in the indicated tires.
Gray wheels
It may not be possible to identify tire pressure
losses.
Possible causes:
▷ Malfunction.
▷ The system is being reset.
Additonal information
The status control display additionally shows
the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐
pending on the model, tire temperatures. It
shows the actual values read; they may vary
depending on driving style or weather condi‐
tions.
Resetting the system
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform
reset".
6. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the fol‐
lowing is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure
Monitor…".
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as reference values. The reset is
completed automatically while driving.
Seite 121
Safety Controls
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
After a successfully completed reset, the
wheels on the Control Display are shown in
green and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See
label for recommended pressures." is dis‐
played.
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
you continue the reset resumes automatically.
Messages
General information
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the
DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched
on.
Safety information
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. There
is a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving.
Repair the flat tire or replace the wheel.◀
If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
Message
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
The system has detected a wheel
change, but no reset was done.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Inflation was not carried out accord‐
ing to specifications.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen
below the level of the last reset.
Measure
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
2. Reset the system.
If the tire inflation pressure is too low
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control
message appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a tire inflation pressure
loss.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1.
Reduce your speed and drive moderately.
Do not exceed a speed of
80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas
station, check and correct the tire inflation
pressure in all four tires, if necessary.
3. Reset the system.
If there is a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐
pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
trol Display.
Seite 122
Controls Safety
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the air pressure in all four
tires, for instance using the tire pressure
gage of a flat tire kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may
not have been initialized. In this case, initi‐
alize the system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
2.
Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or
by changing the wheel.
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit,
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In
this case, have the electronics checked and re‐
placed at the next opportunity.
System limits
Temperature
The tire inflation pressure depends on the
tire's temperature.
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the
tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire in‐
flation pressure.
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the
tire temperature falls again.
These circumstances may cause a warning
when temperatures fall very sharply.
Sudden tire pressure loss
The system cannot indicate sudden serious
tire damage caused by external circumstances.
Failure to perform a reset
The system does not function properly if a re‐
set has not been carried out, for instance a flat
tire is reported though tire inflation pressures
are correct.
Malfunction
The yellow warning light flashes and is
then illuminated continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. It may
not be possible to identify tire pressure losses.
Examples and recommendations in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
▷ The system was unable to complete the
reset. Perform a system reset again.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
Seite 123
Safety Controls
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
tor is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐
sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
function exists. When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
Concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
tween the individual wheels while driving.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐
ence will be detected and reported as a flat
tire.
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for the
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initial‐
ization was performed with the correct tire
inflation pressure.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐
justed to a new value, an initialization was
performed.
Status display
The current status of the flat tire monitor can
be displayed, for example, whether the RPA is
active.
About iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization required
An initialization must be performed in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been
adjusted.
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
Seite 124
Controls Safety
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Performing initialization
When initializing, the set tire inflation pres‐
sures serve as reference values in order to de‐
tect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
firming the tire inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset"
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Messages
Safety information
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. There
is a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving.
Repair the flat tire or replace the wheel.◀
Indication of a flat tire
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control
message appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Identify the damaged wheel. To do this,
check the air pressure in all four tires,
for instance using the tire pressure gage of
a flat tire kit. If the tire inflation pressure in
all tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
may not have been initialized. In this case,
initialize the system.
3. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or
by changing the wheel.
System limits
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss
in all four tires will not be recognized.
Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure
regularly.
▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by ex‐
ternal circumstances cannot be recognized
in advance.
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Intelligent Safety
Concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance system.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐
telligent Safety consists of one or more sys‐
tems that can help prevent an imminent colli‐
sion. These systems are active automatically
every time the engine is started using the
Start/Stop button:
Seite 125
Safety Controls
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ Approach control warning with City light
braking function, refer to page 126.
▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 129.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure.
Press button: the systems are turned
off. The LED goes out.
Press button: the systems are turned on. The
LED lights up.
Settings can be made on the Control Display.
Front-end collision warning
with City Braking function
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
ently, if needed.
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
A camera in the area of the rearview mirror
controls the system.
Seite 126
Controls Safety
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
The approach control warning is available even
if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally, the approach control warning and
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
tem reactions.
General information
The system warns at two levels of an imminent
danger of collision at speeds from approx.
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
the current driving situation.
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
35 mph/60 km/h.
Detection range
Objects that the system can detect are taken
into account.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Seite 127
Safety Controls
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching off
Press button: the system is switched
off. The LED goes out.
Re-press button: the system is switched on.
The LED lights up.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Warning time"
5. Select the desired setting.
The selected time is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently used.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Prewarning
This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the
impending danger of a collision or the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.
Acute warning with braking function
Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐
vention in a possible risk of collision.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Prerequisite for the brake
booster is sufficiently quick and hard stepping
on the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is a risk of a
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: during a braking inter‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
be shut down.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, for in‐
stance by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
Seite 128
Controls Safety
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for instance DSC
OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera in the mir‐
ror is dirty or obscured.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
for example the warning time, the more warn‐
ings are displayed. Therefore, there may also
be an excess of premature or unjustified warn‐
ings and reactions.
Person warning with City
light braking function
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents with
pedestrians.
When driving at city speeds, the system will is‐
sue a warning if there is imminent risk of a col‐
lision with pedestrians, and support this with a
light braking function.
The camera in the area of the interior mirror
controls the system.
General information
With sufficient brightness, the system warns
about possible collision danger with pedes‐
trians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐
prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking
before a collision.
The system reacts to people who are within
the detection range of the system.
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas:
Seite 129
Safety Controls
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching off
Press button: the systems are
switched off. The LED goes out.
Press button: the systems are switched on.
The LED lights up.
Seite 130
Controls Safety
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster.
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Prerequisite for the brake
booster is sufficiently quick and hard stepping
on the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is a risk of a
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: during a braking inter‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
be shut down.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, for in‐
stance by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
ited.
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Seite 131
Safety Controls
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Lane departure warning
Concept
The lane departure warning alerts when the
vehicle on roads with lane markings is about to
leave the lane.
General information
Depending on the country version, the system
issues a warning at speeds between
35 mph/55 km/h and 45 mph/70 km/h.
When switching on the system below this
speed, a message is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
Warnings are issued by means of a steering
wheel vibration. The time of the warning may
vary depending on the current driving situa‐
tion.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess road and traffic
safety. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in response
to a warning.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Lane departure warning
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ Lines: system is activated.
▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking
was detected and warnings can be
issued.
Seite 132
Controls Safety
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Issued warning
If you leave the lane
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel vibrates.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning is canceled in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
Brake force display
Concept
Additional brake lamps indicate emergency
braking to the traffic behind. This can reduce
the risk of a rear-end collision.
General information
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lights light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lights additionally light up.
Attentiveness assistant
Concept
The system can detect decreasing alertness or
fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous
trips, e.g., on highways. In this situation, it is
recommended that the driver takes a break.
Seite 133
Safety Controls
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess one's physical
state. An increasing lack of alertness or fatigue
may not be detected or not be detected in
time. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure
that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driv‐
ing style to traffic conditions.◀
Function
The system is activated each time the engine
is started and cannot be switched off.
After travel has begun, the system monitors
certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that
decreasing alertness or fatigue can be de‐
tected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
▷ Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav‐
ior.
▷ Driving conditions, e.g., length of trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the
system is active and can display a recommen‐
dation to take a break.
Break recommendation
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display
with the recommendation to take a break.
A recommendation to take a break is displayed
only once during an uninterrupted trip.
After a break, another recommendation to take
a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following
situations, e.g., and will either output an incor‐
rect warning or no warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, e.g., in the case of a break
during longer trips on highways.
Seite 134
Controls Safety
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Anti-lock Braking System
ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle maintains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing
active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the greatest possible
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during emergency stop.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by the Antilock Brake System ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Concept
Within the physical limits, the system helps to
keep the vehicle on a steady course by reduc‐
ing engine speed and by applying brakes to
the individual wheels.
General information
DSC detects the following unstable driving
conditions, for instance:
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
When driving with roof load, e.g., with
roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety may
not be ensured in driving-critical situations due
to the elevated center of gravity. There is a risk
of accidents or risk of property damage. Do not
deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC
when driving with roof load.◀
Seite 135
Driving stability control systems Controls
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Overview
Button in the vehicle
DSC OFF button
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive and braking forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
General information
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
reduced during acceleration and when driving
in curves.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold this button but not longer
than approx. 10 seconds, until the indica‐
tor light for DSC OFF lights up in the instru‐
ment cluster and displays DSC OFF.
DSC is switched off.
Engine tuning switches to a sportier setting.
Activating DSC
Press button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go
out.
Indicator/warning lights
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is
deactivated.
M Dynamic Mode MDM
Concept
M Dynamic Mode makes it possible to drive on
a dry roadway with high longitudinal and trans‐
verse acceleration but with limited driving sta‐
bility.
Only in the absolute limit area does the system
intervene for stabilization by reducing the en‐
gine power and by braking interventions on the
wheels. In this driving condition, additional
steering corrections may be necessary.
You may find it useful to briefly activate MDM
under the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
driving off from loose ground.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Safety information
WARNING
When M Dynamic Mode is activated, sta‐
bilizing interventions are carried out only to a
reduced extent. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Adapt to traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene where appropriate. Do not jerk the
steering wheel in response to a warning.◀
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Seite 136
Controls Driving stability control systems
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Activating MDM
Press button briefly.
The DSC OFF indicator light is illumi‐
nated and TRACTION is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
Deactivating MDM
Press button.
DSC OFF indicator light and TRACTION
indicator are no longer illuminated.
Indicator/warning lights
Symbol Description
Indicator light is illuminated and
TRACTION is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster:
M Dynamic Mode is activated.
DSC indicator light also flashes:
M Dynamic Mode controls the drive
forces and braking forces.
Indicator lights light up:
M Dynamic Mode or DSC has failed.
Active M differential
The concept
The active M differential assures continuously
variable locking of the rear axle differential de‐
pending on the driving situation. This prevents
individual rear wheels from spinning even
when DSC is switched off and in M Dynamic
Mode, so that optimum traction is always as‐
sured in all driving situations.
The driver is responsible adapting his or her
driving behavior to the situation.
Servotronic
Concept
Servotronic is a speed-dependent power
steering function.
The system provides the steering force with
more support at low speeds than at higher
ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance,
and makes steering more direct when driving
at faster speeds.
Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord‐
ing to the driving program, so that a direct,
sporty feel or a comfortable steering response
is conveyed.
Programs
Steering force setting options:
▷ COMFORT: low.
▷ SPORT: high.
▷ SPORT+: high.
Selecting a channel
The desired channel is selected using the Driv‐
ing Dynamics Control, refer to page 137.
Driving Dynamics Control
Concept
The Driving Dynamics Control helps to fine-
tune the vehicle's settings and features. Vari‐
ous programs can be selected for this purpose.
The Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC
OFF buttons can each be used to activate a
program.
Seite 137
Driving stability control systems Controls
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Operating the programs
Button Program
DSC OFF
TRACTION
SPORT+
SPORT
COMFORT
Automatic program change
The system may automatically switch to COM‐
FORT in the following situations:
▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐
TION or DSC OFF mode.
DSC OFF
When DSC OFF, refer to page 136, is active,
driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in curves.
Engine tuning switches to a sportier setting.
TRACTION
When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has
maximum traction on loose road surfaces.
M Dynamic Mode MDM, refer to page 136, is
activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐
celeration and when driving in curves.
SPORT+
Concept
Consistently sporty driving with optimized
chassis and suspension and adjusted drive‐
train.
General information
M Dynamic Mode is switched on.
The driver handles several of the stabilization
tasks.
Activating SPORT+
Press button repeatedly until SPORT+
appears in the instrument cluster and
the DSC OFF indicator light lights up.
Automatic program change
When activating cruise control, the program
automatically switches to SPORT mode.
Indicator/warning lights
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The DSC OFF indicator light is illumi‐
nated: M Dynamic Mode MDM is acti‐
vated.
SPORT
Concept
Sporty tuning of the steering and drivetrain for
greater driving agility.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications. The configuration is stored for
the driver profile currently in use.
Activating SPORT
Press button repeatedly until SPORT
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Seite 138
Controls Driving stability control systems
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Configuring SPORT
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure SPORT"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
COMFORT
Concept
For a balanced tuning with maximum driving
stabilization.
Activating COMFORT
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
In certain situations, the system automatically
changes to the NORMAL program, automatic
program change, refer to page 138.
Displays
Program selection
Pressing the button displays a
list of the selectable programs.
Depending on your vehicle's op‐
tional features, the list in the in‐
strument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown.
Selected program
The instrument cluster displays
the selected program.
Drive-off assistant
Concept
This system supports driving off on inclines.
The parking brake is not required.
Driving off with the drive-off assistant
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may
roll back slightly.
Seite 139
Driving stability control systems Controls
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Cruise control
The concept
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed. The
system accelerates and brakes automatically
as needed.
General information
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
The use of the system can lead to an in‐
creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐
tions, for instance:
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet
conditions, or on a loose road surface.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to
property. Only use the system if driving at con‐
stant speed is possible.◀
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, interrupting,
refer to page 140.
Store speed, refer to page 141.
Resume speed, continue cruise con‐
trol, refer to page 142.
Rocker switch: adjust speed, refer to
page 141.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
Seite 140
Controls Driving comfort
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
if necessary.
Switching off
Press button on the steering wheel.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on the
steering wheel.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few
seconds or released while a gear is not en‐
gaged.
▷ If the gear engaged is too high for the cur‐
rent speed.
▷ When M Dynamic Mode MDM is activated
or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐
vated.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter‐
venes.
▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed in the speedom‐
eter and in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 142.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
if necessary.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a
button.
Press button.
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
Seite 141
Driving comfort Controls
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
celerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐
hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Calling up stored speed
Press button on the steering wheel.
The stored speed is reached again and main‐
tained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator lamp
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
tem is switched on.
Desired speed and stored speed
▷ Marking lights up green:
system is active, the mark‐
ing indicates the desired
speed.
▷ Marking lights up orange:
system is interrupted, the
marking indicates the stored
speed.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off.
Status display
Selected desired speed.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
System limits
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if
engine power is insufficient.
PDC Park Distance Control
Concept
PDC is a support when parking. When you
slowly approach an object in the rear, then the
object is reported through:
▷ Signal tones.
Seite 142
Controls Driving comfort
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ Visual display.
General information
The ultrasound sensors for measuring the dis‐
tances are located in the rear bumper.
The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ By the two rear corner sensors at ap‐
prox. 24 in/60 cm from the object.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at ap‐
prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.
▷ When a collision is imminent.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control is activated, the warning can be
delayed due to physical circumstances. There
is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol is not yet active.◀
Overview
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
for instance in the bumpers.
Functional requirements
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers, bicycle racks.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
tion R.
The rearview camera also switches on.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
WARNING
Signal tones
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehi‐
cle is approaching an object. E.g., if an object
is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a sig‐
nal tone sounds from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
entertainment volume can be adjusted.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Tone"
4. "Volume settings"
Seite 143
Driving comfort Controls
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
5. "PDC"
6. Set the desired value.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object is
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are already displayed on the Con‐
trol Display before a signal sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC:
1.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. "Rear view camera"
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for in‐
stance coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, for instance from passing vehicles
or loud machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, wet conditions,
snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
False warnings
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐
lowing conditions even though there is no ob‐
stacle within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered
with ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, for instance in underground
garages.
Seite 144
Controls Driving comfort
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for in‐
stance sweeping machines, high pressure
steam cleaners or neon lights.
As soon as the malfunction due to other ultra‐
sound sources is no longer present, the sys‐
tem is again fully functional.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
area on the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Rearview camera
Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
Display.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv‐
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and
vehicle surroundings closely and actively inter‐
vene where appropriate.◀
Overview
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tailgate.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
necessary, clean the camera lens.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if se‐
lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐
gine is running.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
system was switched on via iDrive.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Switching the view via iDrive
With PDC Park Distance Control activated:
1.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. "Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
Seite 145
Driving comfort Controls
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo can lead to mal‐
functions.
Activating assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
▷ Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, spa‐
tially shaped markings are displayed.
Pathway lines
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐
age of the rearview camera.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the current steering
angle and are continuously adjusted to the
steering wheel movements.
Turning radius lines
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
on the rearview camera image together with
pathway lines.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
Obstacle marking
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, obstacle
markings can be faded into the image of the
rearview camera.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark‐
ings match the markings of the PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control.
Seite 146
Controls Driving comfort
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Parking using pathway and turning
radius lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐
dius lines lead to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning radius line.
Display settings
Brightness.
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Move the Controller to the left if needed.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is reached, and press the Controller.
Contrast.
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Move the Controller to the left if needed.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is reached, and press the Controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, some
assistance functions also consider data from
PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance
Control chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti‐
mate the distance from the objects on the dis‐
play.
Seite 147
Driving comfort Controls
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Climate control
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Interior air quality
The air quality inside the vehicle is improved
by an emissions-tested interior, a microfilter,
and a climate-control system for regulating
temperature, air flow, and recirculated-air
mode.
In addition there are other functions which de‐
pend on the vehicle's equipment, for instance
microfilter/activated-charcoal filter, automatic
climate control with automatic recirculated-air
control AUC, and parked-car ventilation.
Automatic climate control
1 Seat heating, left 70
2 Air distribution settings
3 Rear window defroster
4 Air flow
5 AUTO program
6 Temperature
7 Seat heating, right 70
8 Air conditioning
9 Recirculated-air mode
10 Interior temperature sensor
Seite 148
Controls Climate control
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Press any button except for the following:
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Seat heating.
Switching off
Press the left button for the minimum
speed.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐
sary by using the maximum cooling or heating
power, and then keeps it constant.
Settings
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐
ture setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
engine running.
Switching on/off
Press button.
Air conditioning is switched on or off.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started.
The air conditioning is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 176, devel‐
ops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is
normal.
AUTO program
Concept
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are
controlled automatically.
Switching on/off
Press button.
Depending on the selected tempera‐
ture and outside influences, the air is directed
to the windshield, side windows, upper body,
and into the floor area.
The air conditioning, refer to page 149, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
Recirculated-air mode
Concept
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air flow within the
vehicle.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
Seite 149
Climate control Controls
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply
of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
nently blocked.
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
mode switches off automatically after a certain
amount of time, depending on the environ‐
mental conditions.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐
lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if
needed.
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
Operation
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐
duced automatically to save battery power.
Controlling the air distribution
manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be
adjusted manually.
Operation
Turn the wheel to select the de‐
sired program or the desired in‐
termediate setting.
▷ Windows.
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
▷ Floor area.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Make the following settings to defrost the win‐
dows and remove condensation:
▷ Direct the air distribution onto the win‐
dows.
▷ Increasing the air flow.
▷ Increase the temperature.
▷ Switch on the air conditioning if needed.
Rear window defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter
In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐
crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance, refer to page 210.
Seite 150
Controls Climate control
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Automatic climate control with enhanced features
1 Seat heating, left 70
2 Temperature, left
3 AUTO program
4 Display
5 Maximum cooling
6 Temperature, right
7 Seat heating, right 70
8 Air conditioning
9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode
10 Air distribution, right
11 Air flow, AUTO intensity
12 Air distribution, left
13 Rear window defroster
14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
clear
15 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
sation
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Press any button except for the following:
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Seat heating.
Switching off
Press the left button for the minimum
speed.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐
Seite 151
Climate control Controls
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
sary by using the maximum cooling or heating
power, and then keeps it constant.
Settings
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control reaches this
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed,
by increasing the cooling or heating output,
and then keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐
ture setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
engine running.
Switching on/off
Press button.
Air conditioning is switched on or off.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started.
The air conditioning is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 176, devel‐
ops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is
normal.
Maximum cooling
Concept
The system is set to the lowest temperature,
optimum air flow and recirculated-air mode.
General information
The function is available above an external
temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ And with the
engine running.
Switching on/off
Press button.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow
active.
AUTO program
Concept
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are
controlled automatically.
Switching on/off
Press button.
Depending on the selected tempera‐
ture, the intensity of the AUTO program, and
outside influences, the air is directed to the
windshield, side windows, upper body, and
into the floor area.
The air conditioning, refer to page 152, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window
condensation as much as possible.
In the AUTO program, the air flow may be re‐
duced during a phone call on the hands-free
system.
Seite 152
Controls Climate control
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Intensity
With the AUTO program switched on, the in‐
tensity can be set. This changes the automatic
control for the air flow and air distribution.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
Concept
The automatic recirculated-air control AUC
recognizes odors or pollutants in the outside
air. The outside air supply is shut off and the
interior air is recirculated.
General information
If the system is activated, a sensor detects pol‐
lutants in the outside air and controls the shut-
off automatically.
If the system is deactivated, outside air contin‐
uously flows into the car's interior.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
Switching on/off
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the
outside air and shuts off automatically.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
Recirculated-air mode switches off automati‐
cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐
tain amount of time in order to avoid window
fogging.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO
button to utilize the condensation sensor.
Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
General information
To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTO
program first.
Operation
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Controlling the air distribution
manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be
adjusted manually.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ Floor area.
▷ Windows and floor area: driver's side only.
▷ Windows, upper body region and floor
area: driver's side only.
Seite 153
Climate control Controls
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
If the windows are fogged over, press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Concept
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win‐
dows.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the sys‐
tem switched on.
For this purpose, point the side vents towards
the side windows as needed.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow
active.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the air conditioning or press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.
Rear window defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐
crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,
pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance, refer to page 210.
Ventilation
Front ventilation
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 2.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the ventilation tem‐
perature in the upper body region, arrow 3.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
This does not change the set interior tem‐
perature for the driver and front passenger.
Settings
▷ Ventilation for cooling:
Direct vent in your direction when car's in‐
terior is too hot.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Seite 154
Controls Climate control
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Ventilation in the rear
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the ventilation tem‐
perature, arrow 2.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
This does not change the adjusted interior
temperature.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 3.
Parked-car ventilation
Concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the car's
interior and lowers its temperature, if needed.
General information
The parked-car ventilation can be switched on
and off directly or by using two preset activa‐
tion times. The system remains switched on
for 30 minutes.
The parked-car ventilation system is operated
via iDrive.
Functional requirements
▷ Direct operation: vehicle is in radio-ready
state.
▷ Direct operation or preset activation time:
does not depend on external temperature.
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the
vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus,
limit the maximum activation time to save
the vehicle battery. The system will be
available again after the engine is started or
after a short trip.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort ventilation now"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting the activation time
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Comfort ventilation"
5. Select the desired activation time.
6. Set the desired time.
Activating the activation time
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "For start time at:"
Activate the desired activation time.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol lights up when the activation time is acti‐
vated.
Seite 155
Climate control Controls
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
Seite 156
Controls Climate control
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Universal Integrated Remote
Control
Concept
The integrated Universal Remote Control in
the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func‐
tions of remote-controlled systems, such as
garage door drives, barriers, or lighting sys‐
tems. The Integrated Universal Remote Con‐
trol replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans‐
mitters. To operate the remote control, the
buttons on the interior mirror must be pro‐
grammed with the desired functions. The
hand-held transmitter for the particular system
is required in order to program the remote con‐
trol.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, for instance
the garage door, using the integrated Universal
Remote Control. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the area
of movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the owner's manual of the sys‐
tem to be controlled, the system is
generally compatible with the integrated Uni‐
versal Remote Control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Control elements on the interior mirror
▷ LED, arrow 1.
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
Programming
General information
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the two outer buttons on
the interior mirror simultaneously for ap‐
Seite 157
Interior equipment Controls
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
proximately 20 seconds until the LED on
the interior mirror flashes. This erases all
programming of the buttons on the interior
mirror.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in‐
ches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of
the interior mirror. The required distance
depends on the hand-held transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button
of the desired function on the hand-held
transmitter and the button to be program‐
med on the interior mirror. The LED on the
interior mirror will begin flashing slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing
faster indicates that the button on the inte‐
rior mirror has been programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐
tween the interior mirror and the hand-held
transmitter and repeat the step. Several
more attempts at different distances may
be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds be‐
tween attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
6.
To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐
rior mirror buttons.
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after
repeated programming, please check if the
system to be controlled features a rolling code
radio system.
Read the system's owner's manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior mirror
longer. If the LED on the interior mirror starts
flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for
2 seconds, the system features a rolling code
radio system. Flashing and continuous illumi‐
nation of the LED will repeat for approximately
20 seconds.
For systems with a rolling code radio system,
the integrated Universal Remote Control and
the system also have to be synchronized.
Please read the owner's manual to find out
how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
ond person.
Synchronizing the universal remote control
with the system:
1.
Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the desired button on the interior
mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You
have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds
and then release it. If necessary, repeat this
step up to three times in order to finish
synchronization. Once synchronization is
complete, the programmed function will be
carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to
be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts
flashing slowly, hold the hand-held trans‐
mitter for the system to be controlled ap‐
prox. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from
the buttons of the interior mirror. The re‐
quired distance depends on the hand-held
transmitter.
Seite 158
Controls Interior equipment
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior mirror LED flashes more rapidly. The
LED flashing faster indicates that the but‐
ton on the interior mirror has been pro‐
grammed. The system can then be con‐
trolled by the button on the interior mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
most 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the programming starting with
step 4. Several more attempts at different
distances may be necessary. Wait at least
15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
Operation
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, for instance
the garage door, using the integrated Universal
Remote Control. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the area
of movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior mirror
while the engine is running or when the ignition
is started. To do this, hold down the button
within receiving range of the system until the
function is activated. The interior mirror LED
stays lit while the wireless signal is being
transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐
tions cannot be deleted individually. Press and
hold the two outer buttons on the interior mir‐
ror simultaneously for approximately 20 sec‐
onds until the LED on the interior mirror
flashes rapidly.
Digital compass
Overview
1 Control button
2 Mirror display
Mirror display
The point of the compass is displayed in the
mirror when driving straight.
Operating concept
Various functions can be called up by pressing
the control button with a pointed object, such
as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.
The following setting options are displayed in
succession, depending on how long the con‐
trol button is pressed:
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
setting.
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
Setting the compass zones
Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐
cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐
fer to World map with compass zones.
Seite 159
Interior equipment Controls
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the
set compass zone appears in the mirror.
2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐
trol button quickly and repeatedly until the
number of the compass zone that corre‐
sponds with your location appears in the
mirror.
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐
pass is ready for use again after approximately
10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
event of the following:
▷ The wrong compass point is displayed.
▷ The point of the compass displayed does
not change despite changing the direction
of travel.
▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐
played.
Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metallic
objects or overhead power lines near the
vehicle and that there is sufficient room to
drive around in a circle.
2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
on the display. Next, drive in a complete
circle at least once at a speed of no more
than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐
cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of
the compass.
Left/right-hand steering
The digital compass is already set for right or
left-hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language
Press and hold the control button for approx.
12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control
button again to switch between English "E"
and German "O".
Seite 160
Controls Interior equipment
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐
mately 10 seconds.
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the
mirror lighting switches on.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Ashtray
Opening
Slide the cover forward.
Installing
The ashtray can be inserted in both cup hold‐
ers.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Cigarette lighter
WARNING
Contact with hot heating elements or the
hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause
burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the
cigarette lighter falls down or is held against
the respective objects. There is a risk of fire
and injuries. Hold the cigarette lighter by its
handle. Make sure that children do not use the
cigarette lighter and burn themselves.◀
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
property damage. Replace the cigarette lighter
or socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Slide the cover forward.
The cigarette lighter is located between the
cup holders.
Seite 161
Interior equipment Controls
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Push in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be re‐
moved as soon as it pops back
out.
Sockets
General information
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
ning or when the ignition is switched on.
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Safety information
WARNING
Devices and cables in the unfolding area
of the airbags, for instance portable navigation
devices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag
or be thrown around in the car's interior when
unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that devices and cables are not in the airbag's
area of unfolding.◀
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
a risk of property damage. Only connect bat‐
tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
property damage. Replace the cigarette lighter
or socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Front center console
Slide the cover forward.
Remove the socket or cigarette lighter cover.
Rear center console
Remove the cover.
Seite 162
Controls Interior equipment
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
In the cargo area
The socket is located on the left side in the
cargo area.
USB interface
Concept
Mobile devices with USB port can be con‐
nected to the USB interface.
General information
Follow the information regarding the connec‐
tion of mobile devices to the USB interface in
the section on USB connections, refer to
page 39.
In the center armrest
A USB interface is located in the center arm‐
rest.
In the center console
Slide the cover forward.
A USB interface is located in the center con‐
sole.
Cargo area
Enlarging the cargo area
Concept
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
down the rear seat backrest.
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
60 to 40. The left rear seat backrest is con‐
nected to the center section.
With the through-loading system: the rear seat
backrest is divided at a ratio of 40/20/40.
The rear seat backrests can be folded down
from the cargo area. The center section can be
separately folded down from the rear.
Seite 163
Interior equipment Controls
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Safety information
WARNING
Danger of jamming with folding down the
backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest and the of the
head restraint is clear prior to folding down.◀
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, un‐
secured cargo can be thrown into the car's in‐
terior, for instance in case of an accident, brak‐
ing or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of
injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is
locked after folding it back.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
NOTE
Vehicle parts can be damaged when
folding down the rear backrest. There is a risk
of property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest including head
restraint is clear when folding down.◀
Folding down the rear seat backrest
from the cargo area
1. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo
area to release the rear seat backrest.
2. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves
forward slightly.
3. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
Fold back the backrest
Return the rear seat backrest to the seating
position and engage it.
Fold down the middle section
Reach into the recess and pull the center sec‐
tion forward.
Seite 164
Controls Interior equipment
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Safety information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
vehicle's interior.◀
NOTE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the car's interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 165.
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side,
refer to page 166.
▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 166.
▷ Front storage compartment, in front of the
cup holders, refer to page 166.
▷ Storage compartment in the front center
armrest, refer to page 166.
▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats.
▷ Storage compartment in the rear center
console, refer to page 167.
▷ With two rear seats: Storage compartment
between the rear seats, refer to page 167.
Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Safety information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the vehicle's interior. Objects in
the glove compartment can be thrown into the
vehicle's interior while driving, e.g., in the event
of an accident or during braking and evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
close the glove compartment immediately after
using it.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
Seite 165
Storage compartments Controls
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Locking
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key to separately secure the tail‐
gate, refer to page 57, for instance.
This prevents access to the glove compart‐
ment and to the cargo area.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over, such as at a
hotel, without the integrated key.
Driver's side
Safety information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the vehicle's interior. Objects in
the glove compartment can be thrown into the
vehicle's interior while driving, e.g., in the event
of an accident or during braking and evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
close the glove compartment immediately after
using it.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Compartments in the doors
WARNING
Breakable objects, for instance glass
bottles or glasses, can break in the event of an
accident. Broken glass can be scattered in the
car's interior. There is a risk of injury. Do not
use any breakable objects while driving. Only
stow breakable objects in lockable storage
compartments.◀
Front storage compartment
There is a storage compartment in the center
console.
Center armrest
Front
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.
Seite 166
Controls Storage compartments
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Opening
Fold the center armrest up.
Repositioning
The center armrest can be pushed forward or
backward and engages in the end positions.
Connection for an external audio
device
An external audio device, for in‐
stance an MP3 player, can be
connected via the USB audio in‐
terface in the center armrest.
Storage compartment in the
rear
A storage compartment is located in the center
console.
Storage compartment
between the rear seats
There is a storage compartment between the
rear seats.
Cup holders
Safety information
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
and increase the risk of injury in the event of an
accident. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Use light-weight, unbreaka‐
ble, and sealable containers. Do not transport
hot beverages. Do not force objects into the
cup holder.◀
Front
Two cup holders are located in the center con‐
sole.
To open: slide the cover forward.
To close: slide the cover backward.
Rear
In the center armrest.
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
To open: press the button.
Seite 167
Storage compartments Controls
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
To close: push both covers back in, one after
the other.
NOTE
With an open cup holder, the center arm‐
rest cannot be folded back up. There is a risk
of property damage. Press back the covers be‐
fore the center armrest is folded up.◀
Clothes hooks
Safety information
WARNING
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks
can obstruct the view while driving. There is a
risk of an accident. When suspending clothing
articles from the hooks, ensure that they will
not obstruct the driver's view.◀
WARNING
Improper use of the clothes hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury and risk of property damage. Only
hang lightweight objects, e.g., clothing articles,
from the clothes hooks.◀
General information
The clothes hooks are located in the rear.
Storage compartments in the
cargo area
Storage compartment
One storage compartment each is located on
the left and right side.
Net for storage compartment
Smaller objects can be stored in the net of
right storage compartment.
Multi-function hook
WARNING
Improper use of the multi-function hooks
can lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury and risk of property damage. Only
hang lightweight objects, e.g., shopping bags,
from the multi-function hooks. Only transport
heavy luggage in the cargo area if it has been
appropriately secured.◀
A multi-function hook is located on each side
of the cargo area.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo, refer to page 178, there
are two or four lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Floor net
The floor net can also be used to secure the
cargo, refer to page 178, and store small
parts.
Seite 168
Controls Storage compartments
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Seite 169
Storage compartments Controls
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
BMW M2 Technology
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
High-performance engine
General information
With a displacement of 3 liters, the high-per‐
formance engine generates a maximum power
of 365 hp and a maximum torque of
343 lb ft/465 Nm with Overboost
369 lb ft/500 Nm. With its spontaneous re‐
sponse behavior, a speed range of wide utility
results. The maximum engine speed is
7,000 rpm and is electronically controlled. Be‐
cause of the high engine dynamics, the maxi‐
mum engine speed with the vehicle stationary
is reduced.
Warm-up
During the engine warm-up phase, the high-
performance engine has a somewhat rougher
running behavior because of the emission con‐
trols.
When the engine is cold, the exhaust system
has a slightly metallic undertone due to the na‐
ture of the system.
Overboost
Overboost temporarily increases the maximum
torque to 369 lb ft/500 Nm, for example when
passing.
For this purpose, fully depress the accelerator
pedal.
Compound brake
The high-performance braking system has
perforated compound brake discs.
Because of particular structural characteristics,
there may be operation-related noises during
braking. The functional noises have no effect
on the performance, operational reliability, and
durability of the brake.
Drivetrain
With this vehicle, particular value was placed
on the direct connection from engine to the
drivetrain. Due to the torsionally rigid design of
the drivetrain, as is typical in a sports vehicle,
the transmission of the torque also gives
acoustic feedback.
When there are load changes, this may result
in clicking noises. The clicking noises do not
impair the operation or the service life of the
components.
Driving on racetracks
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
This wear is not covered by the warranty. The
vehicle is not designed for use in motor sports
competition.
The standard brake linings and the wear indi‐
cators are not designed for racetrack opera‐
tion.
Seite 172
Driving tips BMW M2 Technology
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to begin working together
smoothly.
The following instructions will help you to ach‐
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐
trol.
Safety information
WARNING
Due to new parts and components,
safety and driver assistance systems can react
with a delay. There is a risk of an accident. Af‐
ter installing new parts or with a new vehicle,
drive conservatively and intervene early if nec‐
essary. Observe the break-in procedures of
the respective parts and components.◀
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but
do not exceed 5,500 rpm and
106 mph/170 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.
At 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Have drive-in checkup maintenance per‐
formed.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km to
3,100 miles/5,000 km
The engine and road speed can gradually be
increased to a constant speed of
137 mph/220 km/h.
Use the maximum speed of 155 mph/250 km/h
only briefly, e.g., when passing.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
Drive moderately during this break-in period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components above-men‐
tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
Seite 173
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
Safety information
WARNING
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐
cle and can endanger occupants and other
traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter
the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Do not drive with the
tailgate open.◀
Driving with the tailgate open
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust system
WARNING
During driving operation, high tempera‐
tures can occur underneath the vehicle body,
e.g., caused by the exhaust gas system. If
combustible materials, such as leaves or grass,
come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
gas system, these materials can ignite. There
is a risk of injury or risk of property damage. Do
not remove the heat shields installed and never
apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no
combustible materials can come in contact
with hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle
or during parking. Do not touch the hot ex‐
haust system.◀
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
WARNING
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones
can influence one another. There is radiation
due to the transmission operations of mobile
phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of prop‐
erty damage. If possible, in the vehicle's inte‐
rior use only mobile phones with direct con‐
nections to an exterior antenna in order to
exclude mutual interference and deflect the ra‐
diation from the vehicle's interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
General information
When driving through water, observe the fol‐
lowing:
▷ Drive through calm water only.
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
than maximum 9.8 in/25 cm.
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Safety information
NOTE
When driving too quickly through too
deep water, water can enter into the engine
compartment, the electrical system or the
transmission. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. When driving through water, do not ex‐
ceed the maximum indicated water level and
the maximum speed for driving through wa‐
ter.◀
Seite 174
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Braking safely
The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
ard feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations that
require such.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
fort.
The pulsing of the brake pedal indicates that
ABS is in its active mode.
In certain braking situations, the perforated
brake discs can emit functional noises. Func‐
tional noises have no effect on the perform‐
ance and operational reliability of the brake.
Objects in the movement area around
pedals and floor area
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain,
gently press the brake pedal every few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other traffic.
The heat generated during braking dries brake
discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
General information
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear that requires least braking effort. Other‐
wise, the brakes may overheat and reduce
brake efficiency.
Manual transmission:
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
if needed.
M double-clutch transmission:
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down in sequential mode, refer to
page 96.
Safety information
WARNING
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out
and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk
of an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress
on the brake system.◀
WARNING
In idle state or with the engine switched
off, safety-relevant functions, for instance en‐
gine braking effect, braking force boost and
steering assistance, are restricted or not avail‐
able at all. There is a risk of an accident. Do not
drive in idle state or with the engine switched
off.◀
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
tion on the brake pads are increased by the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.
Seite 175
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
sponse - generally this cannot be corrected.
Condensation water under the parked
vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops and collects un‐
derneath the vehicle.
Ground clearance
NOTE
If ground clearance is insufficient, there
might be contact with the front or rear spoiler,
e.g., when driving over curbs or entering into
underground vehicle parking garages. There is
a risk of property damage. Ensure that there is
sufficient ground clearance available.◀
M Driver's Package: driving in the
higher speed range
WARNING
Damage to vehicle components can neg‐
atively impact the driving performance at high
speeds. This includes, among other things
tires, underbody and parts for improving aero‐
dynamics. There is a risk of an accident. Have
damage corrected by a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop. Do not drive at high speeds until the
damage is corrected.◀
Seite 176
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Loading
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Safety information
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them internally and cause a sudden
drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving charac‐
teristics may be negatively impacted, reducing
lane stability, lengthening the braking distan‐
ces and changing the steering response.
There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to
the permitted load capacity of the tires and
never exceed the permitted gross weight.◀
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
vehicle's interior.◀
WARNING
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
be thrown into the vehicle's interior, e.g., in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.◀
NOTE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐
age. There is a risk of property damage. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.◀
Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400–750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Seite 177
Loading Driving tips
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with
ratchet straps, the floor net, or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
To secure the cargo there are two or four lash‐
ing eyes in the cargo area.
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing
straps, retaining straps, draw straps or cargo
nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Floor net
To secure the cargo the floor net can also be
used.
Hook the floor net into the fittings in the cargo
area floor.
Roof-mounted luggage rack
General information
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Seite 178
Driving tips Loading
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Safety information
WARNING
When driving with roof load, e.g., with
roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety may
not be ensured in driving-critical situations due
to the elevated center of gravity. There is a risk
of accidents or risk of property damage. Do not
deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC
when driving with roof load.◀
Securing
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Roof drip rail with flaps
The fixing points are located in the roof drip rail
above the doors.
Fold the cover outward.
Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the
vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they
have a major effect on vehicle handling and
steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass
sunroof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., using
ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
Seite 179
Loading Driving tips
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
The vehicle contains advanced technologies
for the reduction of fuel consumption and
emission values.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐
erate driving style and regular maintenance,
can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐
ronmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Remove roof-mounted luggage racks which
are no longer required following use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass
sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
thereby reduces the range.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, for instance tire size may influence fuel
consumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away immediately
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the quickest way of warming the cold
engine up to operating temperature.
Look well ahead when
driving
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Seite 180
Driving tips Saving fuel
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Avoid high engine speeds
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con‐
sumption and reduces wear.
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift
indicator, refer to page 106.
Use coasting
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to
a halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
erator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switching off the engine
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for
instance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in
traffic congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle au‐
tomatically switches off the engine during a
stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐
onds of switching off the engine.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐
mined by other factors, such as driving style,
road conditions, maintenance or environmental
factors.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
reduce the range, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not
needed.
Have maintenance carried
out
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to ach‐
ieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life.
BMW recommends that maintenance work be
performed by a BMW dealer’s service center.
For information on the BMW Maintenance
System, refer to page 210.
Seite 181
Saving fuel Driving tips
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Refueling
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 186, prior to refueling.
Safety information
NOTE
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of property
damage. Refuel promptly.◀
Fuel cap
Opening
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
Seite 184
Mobility Refueling
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Closing
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be
jammed and crushed during closing. The cap
cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors
can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Pay attention that the retain‐
ing strap is not jammed or crushed when clos‐
ing the lid.◀
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction.
Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Observe the following when
refueling
General information
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Observe safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
Safety information
NOTE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfill‐
ing of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys‐
tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged by
contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the
environment. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Avoid overfilling.◀
Seite 185
Refueling Mobility
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Fuel recommendation
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in
winter, e.g., helps make a cold start easier.
Gasoline
General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐
tent.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.
Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐
dards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Safety information
NOTE
Do not press the Start/Stop button after
refueling with the wrong fuel. Furthermore, the
catalytic converter is permanently damaged.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not re‐
fuel or add the following in the case of gasoline
engines:
▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, e.g., manganese or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.◀
NOTE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and the engine. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not use fuels with a higher per‐
centage of ethanol than recommended. Do not
refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5
to M100.◀
NOTE
Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
mum quality can compromise engine function
or cause engine damage. There is a risk of
property damage. Do not fill with fuel that does
not comply with the minimum quality.◀
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result
in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
Seite 186
Mobility Fuel
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
Recommended fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 93.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 91.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high external temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Seite 187
Fuel Mobility
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Tire inflation pressure
General information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
▷ Fuel consumption.
Safety information
WARNING
A tire with low or missing tire inflation
pressure impacts handling, such as steering
and braking response. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐
sure, and correct it as needed, e.g., twice a
month and before a long trip.◀
Checking the tire inflation pressure
General information
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold, i.e.:
▷ Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has
not been exceeded.
▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at
least 2 hours after a trip.
The tire inflation pressure specifications only
relate to cold tires or tires at the same temper‐
ature as the ambient temperature.
Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation
pressure increases with the tire temperature.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐
flation pressure.
Check whether all valve caps are screwed onto
the tire valves.
After correcting the tire inflation
pressure
For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.
For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Tire inflation pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 189, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 189, and adjust as necessary.
Seite 188
Mobility Wheels and tires
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
These pressure values can also be found on
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's
door pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
M2
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications
in bar/PSI with
cold tires
235/40 R 18
95 V M+S XL
Std
2.1 / 30 2.3 / 33
F: 245/35 R 19
93 (Y) XL Std
2.4 / 35 -
R: 265/35 R 19
98 (Y) XL Std
- 2.4 / 35
Tire inflation pressures at max.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
WARNING
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 189, and adjust as necessary.
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
M2
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications
in bar/PSI with
cold tires
235/40 R 18
95 V M+S XL
Std
2.4 / 35 2.7 / 39
F: 245/35 R 19
93 (Y) XL Std
2.7 / 39 -
R: 265/35 R 19
98 (Y) XL Std
- 2.9 / 42
Tire identification marks
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Maximum tire load
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible
weight for which the tire is approved.
Seite 189
Wheels and tires Mobility
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire side‐
wall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR
– on the certification label on the driver’s door
pillar.
Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater
than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle
Weight Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear
GAWR and tire loads, respectively.
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
R = up to 106 mph/170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph/180 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 2117
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
2117: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
Recommendation
Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at
least every 6 years.
Manufacture date
You can find the manufacture date of the tire
on the tire's sidewall.
Designation Manufacture date
DOT … 2117 21st week of 2017
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera‐
ture A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well
on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how‐
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris‐
tics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Seite 190
Mobility Wheels and tires
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Mo‐
tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
Band A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.◀
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased
risk of hydroplaning.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for
winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐
quired minimum height of 0.063 in‐
ches/1.6 mm.
The positions of the wear indicators are
marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread
Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations.
▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can be caused by the following situa‐
tions, for instance:
▷ Driving over curbs.
Seite 191
Wheels and tires Mobility
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ Road damage.
▷ Tire inflation pressure too low.
▷ Vehicle overloading.
▷ Incorrect tire storage.
Safety information
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is a risk of an accident. If tire
damage is suspected while driving, immedi‐
ately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and
tires checked. For this purpose, drive carefully
to the nearest dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Have vehicle towed or transported as
needed.◀
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is a risk of an accident. Do not
repair damaged tires, but have them re‐
placed.◀
WARNING
Tires can become damaged by driving
over obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at
high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire
cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-sec‐
tion, the higher the risk of tire damage. There
is a danger of accidents and property damage.
If possible, drive around obstacles, or drive
over them slowly and carefully.◀
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
out by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Wheel and tire combination
General information
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
about the correct wheel/tire combination and
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations impair the
function of a variety of systems such as ABS or
DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel/
tire combination remounted on the vehicle as
soon as possible.
Safety information
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐
cle, for instance due to contact with the body
due to tolerances despite the same official size
rating. There is a risk of an accident. The man‐
ufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests
that you use wheels and tires that have been
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for
your vehicle type.◀
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. The tire
brands can be identified by a star on the tire
sidewall.
Seite 192
Mobility Wheels and tires
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
WARNING
Retreaded tires can have different tire
casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐
ice life can be limited. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
not recommend the use of retreaded tires.◀
Winter tires
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they usually do not provide the same level of
performance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then attach a label showing the permissible
maximum speed in the field of view. The label
is available from a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
With winter tires mounted, observe and do not
exceed the permissible maximum speed.
Rotating wheels between axles
The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
against switching wheels between the front
and rear axles. This can impair the handling
characteristics.
Rotating the tires between the axes is not per‐
missible on vehicles with different tire sizes or
rim sizes on the front and rear axles.
Storing tires
Air pressure
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark
place.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease, and solvents.
Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Mobility System
Concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed temporarily to enable continued
Seite 193
Wheels and tires Mobility
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
into the tires, which seals the damage from the
inside.
General information
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire. Only remove
foreign objects if they are visibly protruding
from the tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering
wheel.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the
TPM wheel electronics replaced at the
next opportunity.
▷ The compressor can be used to check the
tire inflation pressure.
Storage
The Mobility System is located under the
cargo floor panel.
Sealant container
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
Compressor
1 Sealant container holder
2 Compressor
3 Connector/cable for socket
4 Connection hose
5 On/off switch
6 Tire pressure gage
7 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Seite 194
Mobility Wheels and tires
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Filling the tire with sealant
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain pollutants which are colorless and odor‐
less. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation.◀
NOTE
The compressor can overheat during ex‐
tended operation. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 min.◀
Filling
1.
Shake the sealant container.
2. Pull the connection hose fully out of the
compressor housing. Do not kink the hose.
3. Screw the connection hose onto the con‐
nector of the sealant container.
4. Insert the sealant container on the com‐
pressor housing in an upright position.
5. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve
and screw the filling hose of the sealant
container onto the tire valve of the non‐
working wheel.
Seite 195
Wheels and tires Mobility
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
6. With the compressor switched off, insert
the plug into the power socket inside the
vehicle.
7. With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, switch on the compressor.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to
fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire infla‐
tion pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compres‐
sor at this point.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not
reached:
1.
Switch off the compressor.
2. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
3. Unscrew the filling hose from the tire valve.
4. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
5. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be
reached, contact your dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Stowing the Mobility System
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer from the tire valve.
2. Pull the compressor connector out of the
socket inside the vehicle.
3. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the sealant container.
4. Connect the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer previously connected to the tire
valve with the available connector on the
sealant container.
This prevents leftover sealant escaping
from the sealant container.
5. Wrap and store the sealant container in
suitable material to avoid dirtying the cargo
area.
6. Stow the Mobility System back in the
cargo area.
Distributing the sealant
Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐
sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the
tire.
Do not exceed the permissible maximum
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
Correcting the tire inflation pressure
1.
Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the com‐
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
3. Insert the connector into the power socket
inside the vehicle.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to
2.5 bar.
▷ Increase tire inflation pressure: with the
ignition switched on or the engine run‐
ning, switch on the compressor.
Seite 196
Mobility Wheels and tires
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ Reduce tire inflation pressure: press
the button on the compressor.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the run-flat tires.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System at the next
opportunity.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 235/40 R 18.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Do not initialize the run-flat tires after mount‐
ing snow chains, as doing so may result in in‐
correct readings.
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
after mounting snow chains, as doing so may
result in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, if needed,
briefly activate M Dynamic Mode.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
Changing wheels/tires
General information
When a flat tire kit is used, an immediate wheel
change when there is a loss of tire inflation
pressure in the event of a flat tire is not always
necessary.
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
available as accessories from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
DANGER
The vehicle jack is only provided for
short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel
changes. Even if all safety measures are ob‐
served, there is a risk of the raised vehicle fall‐
ing, if the vehicle jack tilts over. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is
raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not
start the engine.◀
WARNING
The vehicle jack is provided by the vehi‐
cle manufacturer for changing wheels in the
event of a flat tire. The vehicle jack is not de‐
signed for frequent use, for instance for chang‐
ing from summer to winter tires. Using the ve‐
hicle jack frequently may cause it to jam or
become damaged. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. Only use the vehi‐
cle jack to change an emergency wheel or a
spare tire in the event of a flat tire.◀
WARNING
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for
example snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack
can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If possi‐
ble, change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-
resistant surface.◀
Seite 197
Wheels and tires Mobility
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
WARNING
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
the vehicle and for the jacking points on the
vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift
any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle
jack.◀
WARNING
If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the
jacking point provided for this purpose, the ve‐
hicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may
slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. When
cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is
inserted in the jacking point next to the wheel
housing.◀
WARNING
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack
may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are ex‐
erted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property. While the vehicle is
raised, do not exert lateral forces on the vehicle
or pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck
wheel removed by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.◀
Securing the vehicle against rolling
General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to ad‐
ditionally secure the vehicle against rolling
away when changing a wheel.
On a level surface
Place chocks or other suitable objects, for ex‐
ample a rock, in front of and behind the wheel
that is diagonally opposite to the wheel that
you wish to change.
On a slight downhill gradient
If you need to change a wheel on a slight
downhill grade, place chocks and other suita‐
ble objects, for instance a rock, under the
wheels of both the front and rear axles against
the rolling direction.
Lug bolt lock
Concept
The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The
lug bolts can only be released with the adapter
which matches the coding.
Overview
The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the on‐
board vehicle tool kit or in a storage compart‐
ment close to the onboard vehicle tool kit.
Seite 198
Mobility Wheels and tires
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1.
▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing
1.
Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the
lug bolt.
Screwing on
1.
Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If neces‐
sary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug
bolt.
2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening tor‐
que is 140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after
screwing on the lug bolt.
Preparing the vehicle
▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip
ground at a safe distance from traffic.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever
to position P.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ Depending on the equipment version, get
tools and the emergency wheel from the
vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning light at an appro‐
priate distance.
▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items
under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot
reach its carrying capacity because of the
restricted height.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against roll‐
ing.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the indicated positions.
Jacking up the vehicle
WARNING
Hands and fingers can be jammed when
using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with the described hand position and
Seite 199
Wheels and tires Mobility
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
do not change this position while using the ve‐
hicle jack.◀
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar‐
row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank
with your other hand, arrow 2.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point closest to the
wheel to be changed.
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehi‐
cle jack crank or lever clockwise.
4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack
as soon as the vehicle jack is under load
and continue turning the vehicle jack crank
or lever with one hand.
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot is ex‐
tended vertically.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and perpendicularly beneath the
jacking point after extending the vehicle
jack.
7. Crank up the vehicle jack until the entire
surface of the jack is in contact with the
ground and the wheel in question is raised
a maximum of 1.2 inches/3 cm off the
ground.
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.
1.
Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two lug bolts in a
crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the ve‐
hicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac‐
companying lug bolts may have to be used
as well.
Seite 200
Mobility Wheels and tires
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐
tern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclock‐
wise to retract the vehicle jack and lower
the vehicle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se‐
curely.
After the wheel change
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐
ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo
area, if necessary.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
under the cargo floor panel because of its
size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the run-flat tires.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the
nearest dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 201
Wheels and tires Mobility
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Filler neck for washer fluid
4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
5 Engine compartment fuse box
6 Coolant reservoir
7 Oil filler neck
Hood
Safety information
WARNING
Improperly executed work in the engine
compartment can damage vehicle compo‐
nents and impair vehicle functions. There is a
risk of personal and property damage. The
manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that, in the effort to avoid such risks, work in
the engine compartment be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.◀
Seite 202
Mobility Engine compartment
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
WARNING
The engine compartment accommo‐
dates moving components. Certain compo‐
nents in the engine compartment can also
move with the vehicle switched off, for in‐
stance the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury.
Do not reach into the area of moving parts.
Keep articles of clothing and hair away from
moving parts.◀
WARNING
There are protruding parts, for instance
locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There
is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay atten‐
tion to protruding parts and keep clear of these
areas.◀
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open
while driving and restrict visibility. There is a
risk of an accident. Stop immediately and cor‐
rectly close the hood.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when open‐
ing and closing the hood. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the area of movement of
the hood is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Opening the hood
1.
Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
Indicator/warning lights
When the hood is unlocked, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Closing the hood
Let the hood drop from a height of approx.
16 inches/40 cm and push down on it to lock it
fully.
The hood must engage on both sides.
Seite 203
Engine compartment Mobility
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
your driving style and driving conditions.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling by taking a detailed measure‐
ment.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
the following situations, for example:
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine.
▷ Idling of the engine.
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classi‐
fied as not suitable.
Different Check Control messages appear on
the Control Display depending on the engine
oil level.
Safety information
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage. Immediately add engine oil.◀
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk
of property damage. Do not add too much en‐
gine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have oil level corrected by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Electronic oil measurement
General information
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐
uring principles:
▷ Monitoring.
▷ Detailed measurement.
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a dynamic driving style, for instance
when taking curves aggressively, regularly per‐
form a detailed measurement.
Monitoring
Concept
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
while driving and can be shown on the Control
Display.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
Functional requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving.
Displaying the engine oil level
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
Seite 204
Mobility Engine oil
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
System limits
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a dynamic driving style, it may not be
possible to calculate a measured value. In this
case, the measured value for the last, suffi‐
ciently long trip is displayed.
Detailed measurement
Concept
The engine oil level is checked when the vehi‐
cle is stationary and displayed via a scale.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
General information
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
Functional requirements
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral
position, clutch and accelerator pedals not
depressed.
▷ M Double clutch transmission: selector
lever in selector lever position N and accel‐
erator pedal not depressed.
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐
perature.
Performing a detailed measurement
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
4. "Measure engine oil level"
5. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed
via a scale.
Adding engine oil
General information
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to
page 206.
Safely park the vehicle and switch off the igni‐
tion before adding engine oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating materials, e.g., oils, greases,
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredi‐
ents. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Observe the instructions on the containers.
Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
erating materials into different bottles. Store
operating materials out of reach of children.◀
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage. Immediately add engine oil.◀
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk
of property damage. Do not add too much en‐
gine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have oil level corrected by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Seite 205
Engine oil Mobility
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
partment, refer to page 202.
Adding engine oil
1. Open the hood, refer to page 202.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise.
3. Add engine oil.
Engine oil types to add
General information
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of
the engine.
Safety information
NOTE
Oil additives can damage the engine.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not use
oil additives.◀
NOTE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐
tions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk
of property damage. When selecting an engine
oil, make sure that the engine oil has the cor‐
rect oil rating.◀
Suitable engine oil types
You can add engine oils that meet the follow‐
ing oil rating standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
API SL, API SM, or API SN.
Viscosity grades
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Engine oil change
NOTE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely
fashion can cause increased engine wear and
thus engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
cated in the vehicle.◀
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop change
the engine oil.
Seite 206
Mobility Engine oil
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Seite 207
Engine oil Mobility
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Coolant
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open
the cooling system with the engine cooled
down.◀
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is a risk of
injury and risk of property damage. Do not al‐
low additives to come into contact with skin,
eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi‐
tives only.◀
Coolant level
Checking
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
4. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
tween the minimum and maximum marks
in the filler neck.
Seite 208
Mobility Coolant
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Adding
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Turn the lid until there is an audible click.
The arrows on the coolant reservoir and
the lid must point towards one another.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 209
Coolant Mobility
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
BMW maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases, scopes and intervals may vary
according to the country-specific version. Re‐
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
cants, and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
rately. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Concept
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of the vehicle.
CBS uses these to calculate the need for
maintenance.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
General information
Information on service requirements, refer to
page 105, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control. The
dealer’s service center can read this data out
and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi‐
cle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els for additional information on service re‐
quirements.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
Seite 210
Mobility Maintenance
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐
lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
tained.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Safety information
NOTE
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an
intricate component intended to be used in
conjunction with specialized equipment to
check the vehicle’s primary emissions system.
Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐
nosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a
dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or other persons
that have the specialized training and equip‐
ment for purposes of properly utilizing the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
Seite 211
Maintenance Mobility
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located under
the cargo floor panel.
Wiper blade replacement
Safety information
NOTE
If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield
without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐
shield can be damaged. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Secure the wiper arm when re‐
placing the wiper blades and do not fold down
the wipers without the wiper blades installed.◀
Replacing the wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the
wiper arms, refer to page 92.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and
fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2.
4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the
catch.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold down the wipers.
NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Light and bulb replacement
General information
Lights and bulbs
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
tion to vehicle safety.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have the relevant work carried out a deal‐
Seite 212
Mobility Replacing components
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
A spare light box is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Observe the safety information, refer to
page 213.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
source. These light-emitting diodes, which are
related to conventional lasers, are officially
designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Observe the safety information, refer to
page 213.
Safety information
Lights and bulbs
WARNING
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a
risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they
have cooled off.◀
WARNING
Work on switched-on lighting systems
can cause short circuits. There is a risk of in‐
jury or risk of property damage. When working
on the lighting system, switch off the lamps in
question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐
turer's instructions.◀
NOTE
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not hold
new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean
cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by
its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
WARNING
Too intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
injury. Do not look directly into the headlights
or other light sources. Do not remove the LED
covers.◀
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the lights switched on, the con‐
densation evaporates after a short time. The
headlight glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the headlights switched
on, increasing humidity forms, for instance wa‐
ter droplets in the light, have the headlights
checked.
Front lights, bulb replacement
LED headlights
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
All front lamps and side turn signals are de‐
signed with LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Turn signal in exterior mirror
The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature
LED technology. In the case of a malfunction,
contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 213
Replacing components Mobility
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Tail lamps, bulb replacement
Overview
1 Turn signal
2 Outer brake lights
3 Inside brake light
4 Reversing light
5 Rear light
Bulb replacement
General information
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 213.
Reversing light: 21-watt bulb, W21W.
The turn signals, brake lights, and rear lights
feature LED technology. In the case of a mal‐
function, contact a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Removing the tail lamp
1.
Open tailgate.
2. Open the two covers on the tail lamp.
3. With the handle of the screwdriver from the
onboard vehicle tool kit, loosen and re‐
move the nuts on the two fasteners. Make
sure that the nuts do not drop into the
bumper area. In addition to the two outer
fasteners, there is another inner fastener.
4. Hold the grip rail in one hand, arrow 1, and
brace against the outside with your other
hand, arrow 2. Carefully pry out the tail
lamp, arrow 3, until the rubber mount re‐
leases from the inner fastener.
5. Remove the plug from the bulb holder.
Replacing the bulbs
1.
Turn the cover in the direction indicated on
the housing and remove it.
Seite 214
Mobility Replacing components
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
2. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
3. Install the new bulb and cover in reverse
order of removal.
Installing the tail lamp
1. Connect the plug to the bulb holder.
2. Insert the tail lamp straight in and press it
in, arrow 1, until the rubber mount latches
in the inner fastener. Make sure when in‐
serting the tail lamp that the rubber lip, ar‐
row 2, on the top side of the tail lamp does
not fold over. Screw on the two nuts, ar‐
row 3, and close covers.
Central brake lamp and license plate
lamp
Observe the safety information, refer to
page 213.
These lights are made using LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free.
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
service life of the battery.
More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Replacing the vehicle battery
General information
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that you have a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after
the battery has been replaced. Once the bat‐
tery has been registered again, all comfort fea‐
tures will be available without restriction and
any Check Control messages displayed which
relate to comfort features will disappear.
Safety information
NOTE
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair vehi‐
cle functions. There is a risk of personal and
property damage. Only vehicle batteries that
are compatible with your vehicle type should
be installed in your vehicle. Information on
compatible vehicle batteries is available at your
dealer’s service center.◀
Charging the battery
General information
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
remains usable for its full service life.
A discharged battery is indicated by a
red indicator light.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
Seite 215
Replacing components Mobility
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Safety information
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
a risk of property damage. Only connect bat‐
tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 221, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs to
be newly initialized or individual settings up‐
dated, for example:
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐
tions again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Glass sunroof and sliding visor: initialize
the system.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Safety information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is a risk
of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse.
Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a sub‐
stitute of another color or amperage rating.◀
Replacing a fuse
The fuses are located in two different places in
the vehicle.
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box
in the cargo area.
In the engine compartment
General information
On right-hand drive vehicles, the fuses are lo‐
cated on the opposite side of the engine com‐
partment.
Removing the cover
1.
Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen
the three cover screws, arrow 1.
2. Squeeze and raise the holder, arrow 2.
Seite 216
Mobility Replacing components
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3.
4. Press the four fasteners and remove the
cover.
Attaching the covers
1.
When attaching the cover, make sure that
all four fasteners are engaged.
2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and
then thread it between the bars.
3. Press down on the holder and tighten the
three screws.
In the cargo area
Fold up the cargo floor panel.
Information on the fuse types and locations is
found on a separate sheet.
Seite 217
Replacing components Mobility
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
The red light in the button flashes when the
hazard warning flashers are activated.
Intelligent emergency call
Concept
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
quest can be made through the system.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable con‐
ditions.
Overview
SOS button in the roofliner
Functional requirements
▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷ The radio-ready state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, for instance if the air‐
bags trigger, an Emergency Request is auto‐
matically initiated immediately after an acci‐
dent of corresponding severity. Automatic
Collision Notification is not affected by press‐
ing the SOS button.
Initiating an Emergency Request
manually
1.
Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the
button lights up green.
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an
Emergency Request has been initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the Control
Display, the Emergency Request can be
aborted.
Seite 218
Mobility Breakdown assistance
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection
to the BMW Response Center has been
established.
The BMW Response Center then makes
contact with you and takes further steps to
help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum‐
stances.
For this, data is transmitted to the BMW
Response Center which serves to deter‐
mine the necessary rescue measures. E.g.,
the current position of the vehicle, if it can
be established.
Even if you can no longer hear the BMW
Response Center through the loudspeak‐
ers, the BMW Response Center may still
be able to hear you.
The BMW Response Center ends the Emer‐
gency Request.
Roadside Assistance
General information
Roadside Assistance can be reached around
the clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐
sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance
Concept
BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
down.
General information
In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehi‐
cle's condition are sent directly to Roadside
Assistance.
Roadside Assistance can also be contacted via
a Check Control message, refer to page 103.
Requirements
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equip‐
ment version with Intelligent emergency
call or BMW ConnectedDrive services.
▷ Cellular network reception.
▷ Ignition or standby state is switched on.
Starting Roadside Assistance
If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices,
support is offered through Teleservice Diagno‐
sis.
Using iDrive:
1.
"ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Assist"
3. "BMW Roadside Assistance"
A voice connection is established.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that is im‐
portant for vehicle diagnosis. This data is
transmitted automatically.
A voice connection is established to Roadside
Assistance.
Starting Teleservice Help
Teleservice Help enables an in-depth diagno‐
sis of the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via
wireless transmission.
You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting
it through Roadside Assistance.
1.
Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
Seite 219
Breakdown assistance Mobility
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
3. Control Display is switched on.
4. "Teleservice Help"
The driving ability of the vehicle can be re‐
stored for specific functions.
If this is not possible, further measures will be
initiated, for instance Roadside Assistance will
be informed.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located on the inside of
the tailgate.
To remove, loosen the bracket.
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any expired items
promptly.
Storage
The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area in
the storage compartment.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Do not touch any components
that are under voltage.◀
WARNING
If the jumper cables are connected in the
incorrect order, sparking may occur. There is a
risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order
during connection.◀
NOTE
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Make sure that no body contact occurs.◀
Seite 220
Mobility Breakdown assistance
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage
information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Starting aid terminals
The starting aid terminal in the engine com‐
partment acts as the battery's positive termi‐
nal.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
battery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
1. Pull off the lid of the BMW starting aid ter‐
minal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1.
Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
Seite 221
Breakdown assistance Mobility
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Tow-starting and towing
Safety information
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.◀
Manual transmission
Towing or pushing the vehicle
A broken-down vehicle can be towed or
pushed.
Roll or push, refer to page 94, the vehicle.
Follow the following instructions:
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn
signals, and wipers may be unavailable.
▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no
power assist. Consequently, more force
needs to be applied when braking and
steering.
▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
quired.
▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise,
it will not be possible to control the vehi‐
cle's response.
▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of
30 mph/50 km/h.
▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of
30 miles/50 km.
Tow truck
With rear-wheel drive
Your vehicle should be transported with a tow
truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
NOTE
The vehicle can become damaged when
lifting and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property.
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.◀
M double-clutch transmission:
transporting the vehicle
General information
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Safety information
NOTE
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is
a risk of property damage. The vehicle should
only be transported on a loading platform.◀
Pushing the vehicle
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the
danger area, it can be pushed for a short dis‐
tance.
Roll or push, refer to page 96, the vehicle.
Seite 222
Mobility Breakdown assistance
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Tow truck
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
NOTE
The vehicle can become damaged when
lifting and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property.
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.◀
Towing other vehicles
General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
ing on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden‐
tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign
or a warning triangle in the rear window.
Safety information
WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse. There is a risk of an accident! Make
sure that the gross vehicle weight of the tow‐
ing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be
towed.◀
NOTE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can
occur. There is a risk of property damage. Cor‐
rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting.◀
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable
the vehicle to be towed without jerking.
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the vehicle.
Seite 223
Breakdown assistance Mobility
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit,
refer to page 212, are together in the cargo
area.
Use of the tow fitting:
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for
instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow
fitting.
Safety information
NOTE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
there may be damage to the vehicle or to the
tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Observe the notes on using the tow fit‐
ting.◀
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
push it out.
Tow-starting
M double-clutch transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the M double-clutch transmission.
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties
corrected by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Manual transmission
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
page 220. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐
alytic converter, only tow-start while the en‐
gine is cold.
1. Switch on the hazard warning system and
comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 84.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch pedal pressed and slowly release
the pedal. After the engine starts, immedi‐
ately press on the clutch pedal again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope, and switch off the hazard
warning system.
6. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Seite 224
Mobility Breakdown assistance
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Care
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Washing the vehicle
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as
leaves in the area below the windshield when
the hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐
age the vehicle.
Steam blaster and high-pressure
washer
Safety information
NOTE
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐
ers, components can be damaged due to the
pressure or temperatures being too high.
There is a risk of property damage. Maintain
sufficient distance and do not spray too long
continuously. Follow the operating instructions
for the high-pressure washer.◀
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 in/80 cm.
Automatic vehicle washes
Safety information
NOTE
Water can penetrate in the windshield
area due to high-pressure washers. There is a
risk of property damage. Avoid high-pressure
washers.◀
NOTE
Improper use of automatic vehicle
washes can cause damage to the vehicle.
There is a risk of damage to property. Follow
the following instructions:
▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
the chassis.
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
the exterior mirrors.
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain
sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐
tem.◀
Driving into a vehicle wash with a
manual transmission
In a vehicle wash, the vehicle must be able to
roll freely.
Roll or push the vehicle, refer to page 94.
Seite 225
Care Mobility
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Driving into a vehicle wash with an
M double-clutch transmission with
Drivelogic
Safety information
NOTE
Selector lever position P is automatically
engaged when the ignition is switched off.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not
switch drive-ready state off in vehicle
washes.◀
General information
In a vehicle wash, the vehicle must be able to
roll freely.
Roll or push the vehicle, refer to page 96.
Driving out of a vehicle wash
Make sure that the remote control is in the ve‐
hicle.
Start the engine.
Starting the engine, refer to page 85.
Headlights
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance
from insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced. The heat generated during
braking dries brake discs and brake pads and
protects them against corrosion.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Vehicle care products
General information
BMW recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from BMW. Suitable care
products are available from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
Cleansers can contain substances that
are dangerous and harmful to your health.
There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the in‐
terior, open the doors or windows. Only use
products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol‐
low the instructions on the container.◀
Vehicle paint
General information
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your vehicle care to
these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
tered or discolored.
Matte finish
Only use cleaning and care products suitable
for vehicles with matte finish.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using
a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
Seite 226
Mobility Care
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Upholstery material care
General information
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vac‐
uum cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bev‐
erage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber
cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the
material vigorously.
Safety information
NOTE
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is
a risk of property damage. Ensure that any Vel‐
cro® fasteners are closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disc.
After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
them. The heat generated during braking dries
brake discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface
soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use
only water and suitable cleaning agents for
cleaning.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
or noises.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Plastic components
NOTE
Cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage
plastic parts. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen
cloth lightly with water.◀
Plastic components are e.g.:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Roofliner.
▷ Lamp lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
Seite 227
Care Mobility
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Do not soak the roofliner.
Safety belts
WARNING
Chemical cleansers can destroy the
safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect
of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution
for cleaning the safety belts.◀
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the switchs to retract the safety
belts until they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐
rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.
Displays/screens
NOTE
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
any kind can damage the surface of displays
and screens. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber
cloth.◀
NOTE
The surface of displays can be damaged
with improper cleaning. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Avoid pressure that is too high
and do not use any scratching materials.◀
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Long-term vehicle storage
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be
taken. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 228
Mobility Care
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Seite 229
Care Mobility
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Technical data
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
The technical data and specifications in this
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,
e.g., due to the selected special equipment,
country version or country-specific measure‐
ment method. Detailed values can be found in
the approval documents, on labels on the vehi‐
cle or can be obtained from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
The information in the vehicle documents al‐
ways has priority over the information in this
Owner's Manual.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-specific
measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, e.g., a roof antenna, roof racks
or spoiler. The heights can deviate, e.g., due to
the selected special equipment, tires, load and
chassis version.
BMW M2 Coupe
Width with mirrors inches/mm 78.1/1,984
Width without mirrors inches/mm 73/1,854
Height inches/mm 55.5/1,410
Length inches/mm 176.2/4,476
Wheelbase inches/mm 106/2,693
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 38.4/11.7
Seite 232
Reference Technical data
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Weights
M2
Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 4,430/2,009
M double-clutch transmission lbs/kg 4,430/2,009
Load lbs/kg 840/381
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,140/971
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,380/1,080
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Capacities
US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. 13.7/52.0 Fuel quality, refer to
page 186
Seite 233
Technical data Reference
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐
hicle are listed here.
Updates made after the
editorial deadline
These chapters of the printed Owner's Manual
contain updates made after the editorial dead‐
line.
▷ Information: vehicle identification number,
refer to page 12.
▷ Safety: approach control warning with city
light braking function.
Seite 234
Reference Appendix
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Seite 235
Appendix Reference
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 135
Acceleration Assistant, see
Launch Control 98
Accessories and parts 8
Activated-charcoal filter 154
Activation times, parked-car
ventilation 155
Active M differential 137
Adaptive brake lights, see
Brake force display 133
Adaptive Light Control 114
Additives, oil 206
After washing vehicle 226
Airbags 117
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 118
Air circulation, see Recircu‐
lated-air mode 149, 153
Air conditioning 149, 152
Air, dehumidifying, see Air
conditioning 149, 152
Air distribution,
manual 150, 153
Air flow, air conditioner 150
Air flow, automatic climate
control 153
Air pressure, tires 188
Air vents, see Ventilation 154
Alarm system 61
Alarm, unintentional 62
All-season tires, see Winter
tires 193
Alternative oil types 206
Ambient light 116
Antifreeze, washer fluid 93
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 135
Anti-slip control, see
DSC 135
Anti-theft protection, lug
bolts 198
App, BMW Driver’s Guide 6
Approved axle load 233
Apps, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 6
Arrival time 110
Ashtray 161
Assistance when driving
off 139
Attentiveness assistant 133
AUTO intensity 153
Automatic climate con‐
trol 148
Automatic climate control
with enhanced features 151
Automatic Curb Monitor 76
Automatic deactivation,
Front-seat passenger air‐
bags 119
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 113
Automatic locking 61
Automatic recirculated-air
control 153
Automatic vehicle wash 225
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 152
AUTO program, climate con‐
trol 149
AUTO program, intensity 153
Auto Start/Stop function 86
Auto washing 225
AUX-IN port, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Average fuel consump‐
tion 109
Average speed 109
Axle loads, weights 233
B
Backrest curvature, see Lum‐
bar support 69
Backrest, width 70
Band-aids, see First-aid
kit 220
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 215
Battery replacement, vehicle
remote control 52
Battery, vehicle 215
Being towed, see Tow-start‐
ing and towing 222
Belts, safety belts 71
Beverage holder, cup
holder 167
Bluetooth connection 37
Blu-ray, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
BMW Assist, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
BMW Driver’s Guide app 6
BMW Homepage 6
BMW Internet page 6
BMW maintenance sys‐
tem 210
BMW M technology 172
Bottle holder, see Cup
holder 167
Brake assistant 135
Brake discs, break-in 173
Brake force display 133
Seite 236
Reference Everything from A to Z
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Brake lights, brake force dis‐
play 133
Brake pads, break-in 173
Braking, information 175
Breakdown assis‐
tance 218, 219
Break-in 173
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 34
Bulb replacement 212
Bulb replacement, front 213
Bulb replacement, rear 214
Bulbs and lights 212
Button, Start/Stop 84
Bypassing, see Jump-start‐
ing 220
C
Calendar, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
California Proposition 65
Warning 8
Calling up mirror adjust‐
ment 61
Calling up seat adjust‐
ment 61
Camera-based assistance
systems, see Intelligent
Safety 125
Camera lenses, care 228
Camera, rearview cam‐
era 145
Can holder, see Cup
holder 167
Care, displays 228
Care, vehicle 226
Care, washing the vehi‐
cle 225
Cargo 177
Cargo area 163
Cargo area, enlarging 163
Cargo area, loading 178
Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 168
Cargo, stowing and secur‐
ing 178
Carpet, care 228
Catalytic converter, see Hot
exhaust system 174
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 210
CD/multimedia, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
CD, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 6
Center armrest 166
Center console 18
Central Information Display
(CID), see Control Dis‐
play 20
Central locking system 54
Central screen, see Control
Display 20
Changes, technical, see For
Your Own Safety 7
Changing parts 212
Changing wheels 197
Changing wheels/tires 192
Chassis number, see Vehicle
identification number 12
Check Control 99
Checking the oil level elec‐
tronically 204
Children, seating position 79
Children, transporting
safely 79
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 81
Child restraint system 79
Child restraint systems,
mounting 80
Child seat, mounting 80
Child seats 79
Chrome parts, care 227
Cigarette lighter 161
Cleaning, displays 228
Climate control 148, 151
Clothes hooks 168
Cockpit 16
Combination switch, see Turn
signals 89
Combination switch, see
Wiper system 90
Comfort Access 55
COMFORT program, driving
dynamics 139
Compartments in the
doors 166
Compass 159
Compatible devices, see Suit‐
able devices 37
Compound brake 172
Compressor 193
Computer, see Onboard
Computer 108
Concierge Service, see Own‐
er's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Condensation on win‐
dows 154
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 176
Condition Based Service
CBS 210
Confirmation signal 61
ConnectedDrive, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
ConnectedDrive Services
Connecting device 36
Connecting mobile phone 36
Connecting smartphone 36
Connecting telephone 36
Connections 36
Contacts, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
Container for washer fluid 93
Control Display 20
Control Display, settings 32
Controller 21
Seite 237
Everything from A to Z Reference
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 135
Convenient opening with the
remote control 51
Coolant 208
Cooling, maximum 152
Cooling system 208
Corrosion on brake discs 175
Cosmetic mirror 161
Coupling, see Pairing 36
Courtesy lights during un‐
locking 51
Courtesy lights with the vehi‐
cle locked 51
Cruise control 140
Cruise control without dis‐
tance control, see cruise
control 140
Cruising range 104
Cup holder 167
Current fuel consump‐
tion 104
D
Damage, tires 191
Data memory 9
Data protection, settings 35
Data, technical 232
Date 33
Date display 104
Daytime running lights 114
Defrosting, see defrosting the
windows 150
Defrosting, see Windows, de‐
frosting 154
Defrosting the windows 150
Dehumidifying, air 149, 152
Deleting personal data 35
Deletion of personal data 35
Destination distance 109
Device list 36
Differential lock 137
Digital clock 104
Digital compass 159
Dimensions 232
Dimmable exterior mirrors 76
Dimmable interior mirror 77
Direction indicator, see Turn
signals 89
Display, engine tempera‐
ture 109
Display lighting, see Instru‐
ment lighting 115
Displays, care 228
Disposal, coolant 209
Disposal, vehicle battery 216
Distance control, see
PDC 142
Distance to destination 109
Divided screen view, split
screen 27
Double-clutch transmis‐
sion 94
Drivelogic 97
Drive mode 96
Drive-off assistant 139
Drive-off assistant, see
DSC 135
Driver assistance, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 125
Driver profiles 58
Driver profiles, exporting pro‐
files 59
Driver profiles, importing pro‐
files 60
Driver’s Guide app, see BMW
Driver’s Guide app 6
Driving Assistant, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 125
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 137
Driving instructions, break-
in 173
Driving mode 137
Driving notes, general 174
Driving on racetracks 172
Driving program, see Drive‐
logic 97
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 135
Driving tips 174
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 135
DVD, Video, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 135
E
EfficientDynamics 104
Electronic oil measure‐
ment 204
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, see DSC 135
e-mail, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
Emergency release, fuel filler
flap 185
Emergency Request 218
Emergency service, see
Breakdown assistance 219
Emergency service, see
Roadside Assistance 219
Emergency unlocking, tail‐
gate 58
Energy Control 104
Energy recovery 104
Engine, automatic Start/Stop
function 86
Engine, automatic switch-
off 86
Engine compartment 202
Engine compartment, work‐
ing in 202
Engine coolant 208
Engine oil 204
Engine oil, adding 205
Engine oil additives 206
Engine oil change 206
Engine oil filler neck 205
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 206
Engine oil types, suitable 206
Seite 238
Reference Everything from A to Z
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Engine start, jump-start‐
ing 220
Engine start, see Starting the
engine 85
Engine stop 86
Engine temperature, dis‐
play 109
Entering a destination, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Entering an address, naviga‐
tion, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication 6
Entering a vehicle wash 225
Equipment, interior 157
Error displays, see Check
Control 99
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, see DSC 135
Exchanging wheels/tires 192
Exhaust system 174
Exiting a vehicle wash 225
Exterior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 76
Exterior mirrors 75
Exterior mirrors, malfunc‐
tion 76
External start 220
External temperature dis‐
play 103
External temperature warn‐
ing 103
F
Failure message, see Check
Control 99
False alarm, see Unintentional
alarm 62
Fan, see Air flow 150, 153
Filler neck for engine oil 205
Finding charging stations, see
Charging stations and points
of interest, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Fine wood, care 227
First-aid kit 220
Flat tire, changing
wheels 197
Flat tire message, FTM 125
Flat tire message, TPM 122
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 124
Flat tire, repairing 193
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 120
Flat tire warning light,
FTM 125
Flat tire warning light,
TPM 122
Flooding 174
Floor carpet, care 228
Floor mats, care 228
Fogged up windows 150
Fold-away position, wiper 92
Fold back rear seat back‐
rests 163
Foot brake 175
For Your Own Safety 7
Front airbags 117
Front-end collision warning
with City Braking func‐
tion 126
Front lights 213
Front-seat passenger airbags,
automatic deactivation 119
Front-seat passenger airbags,
indicator lamp 120
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 124
Fuel 186
Fuel cap 184
Fuel consumption, see Aver‐
age fuel consumption 109
Fuel filler flap 184
Fuel gauge 103
Fuel quality 186
Fuel recommendation 186
Fuel, tank capacity 233
Fuse 216
G
Garage door opener, see Uni‐
versal Integrated Remote
Control 157
Gasoline 186
Gear change 97
Gear shift indicator 106
General driving notes 174
General settings 32
Glare shield 161
Glass sunroof, electric 64
Glass sunroof, initialize the
system 65
Glove compartment 165
GPS geolocation, vehicle po‐
sition 33
GPS, navigation, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 233
Ground clearance 176
H
Handbrake, see parking
brake 89
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 158
Hands-free kit, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Hazard warning flashers 218
Head airbags 117
Headlamps 213
Headlight control, auto‐
matic 113
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture 113
Headlight flasher 90
Headlight glass 213
Headlights, care 226
Head restraints, front 72
Seite 239
Everything from A to Z Reference
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Head restraints, rear 73
Heavy cargo, stowing
cargo 178
High-beam Assistant 114
High beams 90
High beams/low beams, see
High-beam Assistant 114
Higher speed range 176
High-performance en‐
gine 172
Hills 175
Hill start assistant, see Drive-
off assistant 139
Holder for beverages 167
Homepage 6
Hood 202
Horn 16
Hotel function, tailgate 57
Hot exhaust system 174
Hotline, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
Hydroplaning 174
I
Ice warning, see External
temperature warning 103
Icy roads, see External tem‐
perature warning 103
Identification marks, tires 189
Identification number, see Ve‐
hicle identification num‐
ber 12
iDrive 20
Ignition off 84
Ignition on 84
Indicator and warning lights,
see Check Control 99
Indicator light, see Check
Control 99
Individual air distribu‐
tion 150, 153
Individual settings, see driver
profiles 58
Inductive charging, see Wire‐
less charging, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Inflation pressure, tires 188
Inflation pressure warning,
tires 124
Info Display, see Onboard
Computer 108
Information 6
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 121
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 125
Instrument cluster 99
Instrument lighting 115
Integrated key 53
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle 45
Intelligent emergency
call 218
Intelligent Safety 125
Intended use 7
Intensity, AUTO pro‐
gram 153
Interior equipment 157
Interior lights 115
Interior lights during unlock‐
ing 51
Interior lights with the vehicle
locked 51
Interior mirror 75
Interior mirror, automatic dim‐
ming feature 77
Interior mirror, compass 159
Interior mirror, manually dim‐
mable 77
Interior motion sensor 62
Internet connection 40
Internet hotspot 40
Internet page 6
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 105
Interval mode 91
In the vicinity of the center
console 18
In the vicinity of the roof‐
liner 19
In the vicinity of the steering
wheel 16
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 199
Jam protection system, glass
sunroof 65
Jump-starting 220
K
Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐
cess 55
Key, mechanical 53
Key, see Remote control 50
Knee airbag 118
L
Label on recommended
tires 192
Lamp replacement, front 213
Lamp replacement, rear 214
Lane departure warning 132
Lane threshold, warning 132
Language, on the Control
Display 32
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 81
Launch Control 98
Leather, care 226
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 213
Light 112
Light-alloy wheels, care 227
Light control 114
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 213
Lighting 112
Light replacement 212
Seite 240
Reference Everything from A to Z
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Lights and bulbs 212
Light switch 112
List of all messages 34
Load 178
Loading 177
Location, vehicle position 33
Locking, automatic 61
Locking, settings 60
Low beams 112
Low beams, automatic, see
High-beam Assistant 114
Lower back support 69
Low Speed Assistant 95
Lug bolt lock 198
Luggage rack, see Roof-
mounted luggage rack 178
Lumbar support 69
M
Maintenance 210
Maintenance require‐
ments 210
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 105
Maintenance system,
BMW 210
Make-up mirror 161
Malfunction displays, see
Check Control 99
Manual air distribu‐
tion 150, 153
Manual air flow 150, 153
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 185
Manual transmission 94
Map update, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Matte finish 226
Maximum cooling 152
Maximum speed, display 106
Maximum speed, winter
tires 193
M Compound brake 172
M differential, active 137
MDM, M Dynamic Mode 136
M double-clutch transmis‐
sion 94
M Driver's Package, driving
instructions 176
M Dynamic Mode MDM 136
Measurement, units of 33
Medical kit 220
Memory function 74
Menu in instrument clus‐
ter 108
Menus 22
Menus, operating, iDrive 20
Messages 34
Messages, see Check Con‐
trol 99
Microfilter 150, 154
Minimum tread, tires 191
Mirror 75
Mirror, see Memory func‐
tion 74
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 174
Mobility System 193
Modifications, technical, see
For Your Own Safety 7
Moisture in headlight 213
Monitor, see Control Dis‐
play 20
Mounting of child restraint
systems 80
MP3 player, see Audio, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
M technology 172
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 16
Music hard disk, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
N
Navigation, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
Neck restraints, front, see
Head restraints 72
Neck restraints, rear, see
Head restraints 73
Neutral cleaner, see Wheel
cleaner 227
New wheels and tires 192
Notes, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
O
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 211
OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐
agnosis 211
Obstacle marking, rearview
camera 146
Octane rating, see Recom‐
mended fuel grade 187
Odometer 103
Office, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication
Oil 204
Oil, adding 205
Oil additives 206
Oil change 206
Oil change interval, service
requirements 105
Oil filler neck 205
Oil types, alternative 206
Oil types, suitable 206
Old batteries, disposal 216
Onboard Computer 108
Onboard vehicle tool kit 212
Online Entertainment, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Seite 241
Everything from A to Z Reference
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Opening and closing 50
Operating concept, iDrive 20
Operating via iDrive 22
Operating with the Control‐
ler 22
Operation via touchscreen 24
Optional equipment 7
Outside air, see Automatic re‐
circulated-air control 153
P
Paint, vehicle 226
Panic alarm, see Panic
mode 62
Panic mode 62
Park Distance Control
PDC 142
Parked-car ventilation 155
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 176
Parking aid, see PDC 142
Parking brake 89
Parking lights 112
Parts and accessories 8
Passenger's side mirror, tilt‐
ing downward 76
Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
era 146
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 142
Personal profile, see driver
profiles 58
Person warning with City light
braking function 129
Pinch protection system, win‐
dows 64
Plastic, care 227
Power failure 216
Power sunroof, glass 64
Power windows 63
Prescribed engine oil
types 206
Pressure, tire air pres‐
sure 188
Pressure warning, tires 124
Preventing Auto Start
Stop 88
Profiles, see driver profiles 58
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 28
Protective function, glass
sunroof 65
Protective function, win‐
dows 64
Push-and-turn reel, see Con‐
troller 21
R
Racetrack operation 172
Radiator fluid 208
Radio-operated remote con‐
trol, opening/closing 50
Radio-ready state 84
Radio, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication
Rain sensor 91
Rear lights 214
Rear socket 162
Rearview camera 145
Rear window de‐
froster 150, 154
Recirculated-air filter 154
Recirculated-air
mode 149, 153
Recommended fuel
grade 187
Recommended tire
brands 192
Refueling 184
Remaining range 104
Remote control, additional 52
Remote control for audio, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Remote control, integrated
key 53
Remote control, loss 52
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 53
Remote control, opening/
closing 50
Remote control, univer‐
sal 157
Remote services, App, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Replacing parts 212
Replacing wheels/tires 192
Reporting safety malfunc‐
tions 12
RES button, see Cruise con‐
trol 140
Reserve warning, see
Range 104
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 121
Retreaded tires 193
Roadside Assistance 219
Roadside Assistancee, see
Breakdown assistance 219
Roadside parking lights 112
Rolling code hand-held trans‐
mitter 158
RON recommended fuel
grade 187
Roofliner 19
Roof load capacity 233
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 178
Route, navigation, see Own‐
er's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
RTTI, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 6
Rubber components,
care 227
S
Safe braking 175
Seite 242
Reference Everything from A to Z
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Safety belt reminder for driv‐
er's seat and front passen‐
ger seat 72
Safety belts 71
Safety belts, care 228
Safety belts, see Safety
belts 71
Safety systems, airbags 117
Saving fuel 180
Screen, see Control Dis‐
play 20
Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit 212
Sealant, see Mobility Sys‐
tem 193
Seat heating, front 70
Seating position for chil‐
dren 79
Seat, see Memory func‐
tion 74
Securing cargo 178
Selection list in instrument
cluster 108
Selector lever 95
Selector lever position 95
Sensors, care 228
Sequential mode 96
Service and warranty 8
Service requirements, Condi‐
tion Based Service
CBS 210
Service requirements, dis‐
play 105
Services, ConnectedDrive
Servotronic 137
SET button, see Cruise con‐
trol 140
Settings, locking/unlock‐
ing 60
Settings on the Control Dis‐
play 32
Shift paddles on the steering
wheel 97
Side airbags 117
Signaling, horn 16
Signals when unlocking 61
Sitting safely 67
Size 232
Slide/tilt glass roof 64
SMS, see Short messages,
see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 6
SMS text message, supple‐
mentary 103
Snow chains 197
Socket 162
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 211
Software update 43
SOS button 218
Sound output, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Speed, average 109
Speed Limit Info 106
Speed Limit Info, Onboard
Computer 110
Speed limits, display 106
Speed warning 110
Split screen 27
SPORT+ - program, driving
dynamics 138
Sport displays, torque dis‐
play, performance dis‐
play 110
SPORT program, driving dy‐
namics 138
Stability control systems 135
Standard equipment 7
Start/stop, automatic func‐
tion 86
Start/Stop button 84
Starting the engine 85
Stations, AM/FM, see Own‐
er's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Status control display,
tires 121
Status information, iDrive 27
Status of Owner's Manual 7
Status, vehicle 111
Steering assistance 137
Steering wheel, adjusting 77
Steering wheel heating 78
Stopping the engine 86
Storage compartment in the
rear 167
Storage compartments 165
Storage, tires 193
Storing the vehicle 228
Stowing and securing
cargo 178
Suitable devices 37
Suitable engine oil types 206
Suitable mobile phones 37
Summer tires, tread 191
Sun visor 161
Supplementary SMS text
message 103
Switch for driving dynam‐
ics 137
Switch, see Cockpit 16
Symbols 6
Symbols in the status field 27
T
Tachometer 103
Tailgate closing 57
Tailgate, emergency unlock‐
ing 58
Tailgate, hotel function 57
Tailgate opening 57
Tailgate via remote con‐
trol 51
Tail lamps 214
Technical changes, see For
Your Own Safety 7
Technical data 232
Technology, BMW M 172
Telephone, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
Seite 243
Everything from A to Z Reference
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Teleservices, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Television, TV, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 149, 151
Temperature display for ex‐
ternal temperature 103
Temperature, engine 109
Terminal, starting aid 221
Theft alarm system, see
Alarm system 61
Thigh support 69
Through-loading system 163
Tilt alarm sensor 62
Time 32
Time of arrival 110
Tire damage 191
Tire identification marks 189
Tire inflation pressure 188
Tire inflation pressure moni‐
tor, see FTM 124
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 120
Tire repair kit, see Mobility
System 193
Tires, changing 192
Tire sealant, see Mobility
System 193
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 188
Tire tread 191
Tone, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Tool 212
Total vehicle weight 233
Touchpad 26
Touchscreen 24
Towing 222
Tow-starting 222
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 120
Traffic bulletins, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Transmission, manual trans‐
mission 94
Transporting children
safely 79
Tread, tires 191
Trip computer 110
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 89
Trip odometer 103
Trip recorder, see Trip odom‐
eter 103
Trunk, emergency unlock‐
ing 58
Turning radius lines, rearview
camera 146
Turn signals, operation 89
Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐
placement 214
TV, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 6
U
Unintentional alarm 62
Units of measurement 33
Universal remote control 157
Unlocking, settings 60
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 7
Upholstery care 227
USB connection 39
USB interface, position in ve‐
hicle 163
USB port, see USB inter‐
face 163
Use, intended 7
V
Vanity mirror 161
Vehicle battery 215
Vehicle battery, replac‐
ing 215
Vehicle, break-in 173
Vehicle care 226
Vehicle care products 226
Vehicle features and op‐
tions 7
Vehicle identification num‐
ber 12
Vehicle jack 199
Vehicle paint 226
Vehicle position, vehicle loca‐
tion 33
Vehicle status 111
Vehicle storage 228
Vehicle wash 225
Vehicle, washing 225
Ventilation 154
Ventilation, see Parked-car
ventilation 155
VIN, see Vehicle identification
number 12
Voice activation system 29
Voice command response,
see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 6
W
Warning and indicator lights,
see Check Control 99
Warning displays, see Check
Control 99
Warning messages, see
Check Control 99
Warning triangle 220
Warranty 8
Washer fluid 93
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 92
Washer system 90
Seite 244
Reference Everything from A to Z
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
Washing the vehicle 225
Water on roads 174
Weights 233
Welcome lamps 113
Welcome lights during un‐
locking 51
Wheel cleaner 227
Wheels, changing 192
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 188
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 124
Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 120
WiFi connection 40
Window defroster,
rear 150, 154
Windows, powered 63
Windshield washer fluid 93
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 92
Windshield washer sys‐
tem 90
Windshield washer system,
see Washer/wiper sys‐
tem 90
Windshield wiper, see Wiper
system 90
Winter storage, care 228
Winter tires, suitable
tires 193
Winter tires, tread 191
Wiper 90
Wiper blades, replacing 212
Wiper fluid 93
Wiper, fold-away position 92
Wiper system 90
Wireless charging dock, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Wireless charging, see Wire‐
less charging, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Wood, care 227
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 24
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle
tool kit 212
Seite 245
Everything from A to Z Reference
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
BMW M
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
01402981836 ue
*BL298183600V*
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981836 - VI/17
